tieng anh THCS

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.32 MB, 229 trang )

(1)LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 7 The first semester WEEK 1:. Preparing date: 13 / 8 / 2010. Teaching date: 16 / 8 / 2010. 19/ 8/ 2010.. ¤n tËp vµ híng dÉn ph¬ng ph¸p häc m«n TiÕng Anh 7. Period 1.. Introduction 1. THE AIMS. a. Knowledge. - By the end of the lesson pupils will be able to consolidate grammar of English 6 and remember grammar structures such as: The simple present tense, the present continuous tense, the near future tense . Then they can do exercises well. - Guide pupils to prepare for the subject. b. skill. - Develop 4 skills. c. Education. Help Ss love to learn English 2. PREPARATION. a. Teacher :Textbook, teacher book, teaching plan, teaching tools.. b. Pupils : Textbook ,notebook, pen, studying tools… 3. PROCEDURE. *Organization(2’) a, Check the old lesson (Greeting)(4’) - Questions + How are you today? +What is the weather like today? +Where did you go yesterday? - Answers +I am fine /..... +It is hot/.... +I went to ..... Teacher’s activities b, New lesson : 1/ Introduce ss how to learn English well :. Ss’ activities - Greeting 2’. -T lets ss read the topics of English 7. - T introduces and explains ss to understand each theme in English 7. - T lets ss write and learn by heart models of sentences and vocabulary.. 2/ Revise programmer of English 6 : grammar. 1. The simple present tense :  Form of to be : ( + ) I: am (-) I am not (?) Am I.....?. - Listen and remember. 20’.

(2) He He Is he She is She is not she...? It It It ( isn’t) it We We Are we You are You are not you...? They They ( aren’t) they  Form of ordinary verbs: get / go/ have / brush....... (+) S + V/ Vs / Ves eg: I go to school by bike. (-) S + do not He gets up at 6 a.m. does not She brushes her teeth . (?) Do + S + V..... ? Does *Note: Verb ending in o / ch / sh /ss /x) add- es to form 3rd person .Eg: He goes / She brushes / He watches.  Use : The SPT is used to express habitual , routine usual actions ` 2. The present continuous tense :  Form : (+) S + am / is / are + V-ing (-) S + am not / is not / are not + V-ing (?) Am / Is / Are + S + V-ing.......?  Use: The PCT is used for an action happening now. 3. The near future tense :  Form : (+) S + am / is / are + going + to -V. (-) S +am not / is not / are not +going + to-V. (?) Am / Is / Are + going + to- V..... ?  Use: The NFT is used for intention or prediction to happen in the near or immediate future.. - Copy down. - Repeat after T. - Copy down. - Retell the use. - Some Ss to retell the main old structure grammar.. - Copy down.. 3/ Exercises : 1. Put the verb in the correct tense : a) She (go).......... to school in the afternoons. b) We (play) .......... game at the moment. c) I (be) .......... a good pupil. d) He (have) .......... a party next week. 2. Practice the dialogue with a partner : Peter: Hello, I’m Peter. Mai: Hi, I’m Mai. Where are you from? Peter: I’m from Canada. Mai: How are you today? Peter: I’m fine, thanks. Mai: Are you going to Hanoi city tomorrow? Peter: Yes, I am. Goodbye. Mai: See you later.. 14’. c, Consolidation : Retell the main points of the lesson. d, Homework : - Ask ss to learn by heart grammar they’ve revised.. 2’. - Work individually. - Go to the bb to give answer keys.. - Work in pairs. Retell the main points.. 1’ -Copy down.

(3) homeworks. Preparing date: 15 / 8 / 2010 Period 2. Teaching date: 18 / 8 / 2010. 19/ 8 / 2010.. Unit 1 : Back to school Lesson 1 : A 1,2. 1, The aims a, Knowledge: By the end of the lesson,pupils will be able to: + Introduce and greet with “Nice to meet you”; “How are you ? ” and listen work in pairs by using “ Nice to meet you” ; “ How are you ? ” fluently and correctly.. + Read the details and revise the simple present tense; comparisons; “a lot of... / many ...” + Answer the questions after reading a text about Hoa correctly. + Remember vocab, sum up the passage by answer the questions about Hoa and copy. * Content: - Vocab: different from, unhappy, to miss, why- because - Structure: Understand and answer the questions "wh". b, Skills. - Practicing speaking skill in pairs. - Improving pupils’reading skill and answer the questions. - Imaging you change school and base on the text, write about it. c, Education. -Pupils can make formal greeting and like to learn English. 2, Preparation: 3, Procedures: *Organization (1’): greeting “Good afternoon!” “Who’s absent today?” a, Checking up ( 5’): a) Questions work in pairs : exercise 2 .1 b) c) Forms of checking: speaking in pairs. d) T corrects and gives marks. b, New lesson : Teacher’s activities * Warm up : slap the board Hello Good morning. Ss’ activities 4’. Too Good bye. - Play game in 2 teams. “slap the board”. Classmate. - T explains the way to play; share the class into 2 teams. - Find out the winner. 1. Pre- listening : -T introduces the situation in A1. - Ask ss to predict the missing words : Ba: Hello, Nam.. 2’. -Ss predict the missing words individually..

(4) Nam: Hi, Ba. Nice to see you again. Ba: Nice to (1)....... you, too. Nam: This is our new classmate .Her name’s Hoa. Ba: Nice to meet (2)......., Hoa. Hoa: (3)....... to meet you, Ba. 6’ 2. While- listening: a) T gets feedback, ss give the answer keys : *Keys : 1- see 2- you 3- nice b) T asks ss to listen A1 (a, b) p.10 in 3 times. - T asks ss to repeat in chorus, and then work in groups of 3. - T asks one or two groups to practice the dialogue in class. - T explains the different “ Nice to see you ” with “ Nice to see you again” “Nice to see you”: 2 Next recordngời gặp nhau lần đầu và đợc giới thiệu để làm quen. -“Nice to see you again”: 2 ngêi gÆp l¹i sau1 thêi gian “slap the board”. * “So am I”: diễn tả sự đồng tình. 5’ 3. Post-listening: Work in pairs.. 4. Pre – teach :( Vocabulary) T presents some new words. - Different ( adj ) : kh¸c nhau ( example) - Unhappy ( adj ) : kh«ng vui , buån ( antonym) - (to) miss ( v ) : nhí ( explanation) - Lots of / a lot of : nhiÒu ( translation) - Many / still : nhiÒu / vÉn cßn ( translation ) - Bigger than : lín h¬n , to h¬n ( example ) - Friends : b¹n bÌ (translation).  ‘Many’ dïng chñ yÕu trong c©u Phñ §Þnh vµ c©u Nghi vÊn.  ‘A lot of (lots of): danh từ ko đếm đc và danh từ số nhiều trong câu Khẳng định. Check: Rub out & Remember. 2. T/F statements prediction : - T explains new situation: Hoa is a new student in HH school. Do you know where is she come from, who’s she staying with? Now just guess about her. - Ask ss to guess T or F? a) Hoa is from Hue. b) She lives with her parents in Hanoi c) She has a lot of friends in Hanoi. d) She misses her parents in Hue. e) She is happy now. 5. While – reading : - Ask ss to read and corrects their predictions. * Get feedback : a) T ; b) F ; c) F ; d) T ; e) F *- Comprehension questions : Ask ss to answer 5 qs < A2- p.11 > in 10’. * Get feedback : a) Hoa is from Hue. b) She is staying with her uncle and aunt in Hanoi. c) No, she doesn’t. d) Her new school is bigger than her old school. e) Because she misses her parents and her friends. 6. Post – reading : * Transformation writing:. 5’. -Listen and give the keys - Listen to the tape. - Repeat in chorus. Work in groups of 3. - Copy down. - Look at the pictures & answer. * They are greeting each other. - Listen & repeat in chorus – Work individually - Copy down. - Rewrite words - Listen. 2’. - Guess T/ F individually. - Ss to guess T or F? 8’. 4’. - Work individually, then share with their partner. - Read the text and check their predictions - Answer the questions (work in pairs).

(5) Ask ss to change “ Hoa” to “ I ” Ex: I am a new student in class 7A. I am from Hue.  For stronger Ss: change the information and change “Hoa” to “I”.  Ex: I’m a new student in class 7B. I’m from BG. …. -Transformation writing. - Look at the example & write. c, Consolidation : Retell the different “Nice to see / meet you” ; “Nice to 2’ see / meet you again ”; Hi / Hello / Good ...... - Retell contents of A2.. - Side- side - Open - pairs - Close- pairs. d, Homework : - Ask ss to learn by heart the way to greet each other and ask 1’ about their health. - Learn by heart vocabulary. - Do exercises in workbook. - Ask ss to prepare lesson for the next period.. WEEK 1:. Preparing date: 18 / 8 / 2010 Period 3. Teaching date: 21 / 8 / 2010. 21/ 8/ 2010.. Unit 1: Back to school Lesson 2 – A 3,4,5,6. 1,The aims a, Knowledge: Pupils will be able to listen & complete the dialogue well and introduce & greet with “How everything” b, Skill: Ps improve 4 skills: L, S, R, and W. Make the same dialogue. c, Education: Ps know to make formal greeting so that they like to learn English. 2, Preparation: a. Teacher’s preparation: textbook, pictures, sub- board, CD, Radio, poster. b. Students’ preparation: book, notebook, workbook 3, Procedures: * Organization (1’): greeting “Who’s absent today?” a. Checking up ( 4’) : - Ask two ss to perform their writing. - T corrects & gives them marks. b. New lesson : Teacher’s activities 1. Pre - teach: A3- p.12 : - Ask ss to look at the picture and answer the questions : - Who are they? - What are they doing? - T plays the tape 3 times. Then ask ss to repeat in pairs. * Mapped dialogue : Mr. Hai Lan .... morning, .... .... morning, .... .... fine, thanks . And you? How.......? .......well. Good bye. Good bye. See..... Ss’ activities 7’. * Mr. Tan & Nga Work in pairs Work in pairs.

(6) * Pre- listening : - T elicits some new words or phrases. - pretty good (adj ): khá tốt, tơng đối tốt ( explanation) - How is everything? : Mäi viÖc nh thÕ nµo?( translation) - Nice to see you! # Nice to see you again! (revision) - So am I / Me, too : T«i còng vËy ( translation) - Just fine: rÊt khoÎ, b×nh thêng. (translation) * Check : Matching 2- While- listening : 2.1) Gap fill : - T hangs a poster about A4 < p.12, 13 > a, b. - Ask ss to predict some missing words or phrases first. - Compare with their partner. - Ask Ss listen to the Radio and check their predictions. * Get feedback : a) Mr. Tan: ... How are you? Miss Lien: pretty good.... How about you? Mr. Tan: Not bad..... Miss Lien: Me, too. b) Nam: ... How is everything? Nga: O.K.... How are you today? Nam: Just fine..... Nam: Yes, So am I. - T gives answer keys( hangs poster) 2.2) Ask ss to work in pairs.( Read again the dialogue) 2.3) A5: Ask ss to listen and write the letter of the dialogue in their order they hear. - T plays cassette 3 times. - T hangs picture cue drill. - Get feedback : 3- Post – listening: Mapped dialogue. Ba Nam .... morning ,.... -----> .... morning, .... .... too .How is ....? --> Nice....again . .... bye. See you again --> Bye. c. Consolidation : Retell the contents of A 3, 4, 5. d. Homework : Learn by heart new words. Do the exercise A1,2,3 < p. 3, 4 – workbook > - Prepare for next lesson.. WEEK 2:. Preparing date: 20 / 8 / 2010 Period 4. 7’. - Repeat in chorallyindividually - Match words 10’. a. Knowledge. - Do individually, then compare. - Listen & check. - Give answer keys.. 7’. - Work in pairs - Listen & write. 5’ - Work in pairs 2’ 2’. - Retell the main points of this lesson. -Copy down homework.. Teaching date: 23 / 8 / 2010. 26 / 8 / 2010. Unit 1: Back to school Lesson 3: b 1-3. Name and addresses. 1. Objective.. - Listen to T.

(7) When finish lesson Ss can: - Ask for and give personal information (name, age, address). Introduce a new classmate. - Ss learn some languages as: Vocab: middle name, who, what, which, where (Revision) Structure: What is your family name? Where do you live? * Identify oneself , write the WH questions in the present simple. Make the dialogue to ask for and give personal information’s classmates and introduce them in the class. Write a passage about oneself and one’s classmates. b. Skill Ss practice dialogue in pairs, fill a record. Improve speaking and writing skills. c. Education Ss are confident to speak at the crowd. 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books, tools, extraboads, visual aids, a stereo, CD, posters.. b. Students Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools… 3. Procedure T’s activities * Organization: - Greeting – “Who’s absent today?” a. Checking up & warm up : +Ask 2 ss to ask & answer the qs;  Where is Hoa from?  Why is Hoa unhappy? T corrects and gives them marks. + Play a game: Slap the board. different unhappy miss just fine pretty good friends T shares the class into 2 teams. b. New lesson : I .Presentation : 1. Pre-teach; T presents some new words; + grade ; khèi líp + family name : hä ( explanation ) + middle name : tên đệm ( example ) + an address : địa chỉ ( example )  Check: Matching. 2. Presentation dialogue : -T presents the dialogue B1- p15 : + How many people are there in this picture? + Who are they? Comprehension qs : -T asks ss to answer the qs given; a. Who is Hoa talking to? b. What is Hoa’s family name? c. What is her middle name? d. Where does she live? - Get feedback. II. Practice :. 1’ 3’. ss’ activities - Greeting. - one asks – the other answers. 6’. 4’. 4’. 14’. -Play game in 2 teams. - Slap the board. - Find out the winner. - Listen to the T - Repeat in chorally – individually. - Copy down. - Match words - listen to the T.. answer in individually a. Hoa is talking to Miss Lien. b. Hoa’s family name is Pham. c. Her middle name is.

(8) 1. Word cues drill : - T runs through the cues. - Ask ss to practice in exchange. * Nam / Nguyen / 15 years old / 20 Le Loi street. * Mai / Tran / 14 / 2 Nguyen khuyen. * Nam / Duong / 16 / 25 Tran phu example exchange: T: What is Nam’s family name? S1: His family name is Nguyen. T: How old is he? S1: He’s 15. T: Where does he live? S1: 20 Le Loi Street. 2. Gap – fill: B2- p.16 Ask ss to fill in each blank with a suitable word Answer key: *Nga: Who..... ? / Who....? / Which....?/ Where....?/ Where.....? - Ask ss to work in pairs. III. Production : B3 – p.16 Ask ss to ask their partner , then fill in the form:  Name: ...................................................................  Age : ...................................................................  Grade ....................................................................  School: ...................................................................  Home address: ...................................................... c. Consolidation : Retell the use of some Wh - qs. d. Homework : Do the exercise ( B1,2 p. 5,6 – workbook ) Learn by heart new words.. WEEK 2:. Preparing date: 22 / 8 / 2010 Period 5. Thi. - run through the cues Practice in exchange: T- the whole class half – half open pairs close pairs.. - Do individually. 10’ -Ask their partners to fill some information in the form.. 2’ 1’. - Retell - Do the exercises. Teaching date: 26 / 8 / 2010. 27 / 8 / 2010. Unit 1: Back to school.

(9) Lesson 4: b 4,5. 1. Objective. a. Knowledge. When finish lesson Ss can use “How far” questions and answers with “kilometers / meters” to talk about distance. - Ask and answer about the distance, traspost; practice with their partner by using Whquestions; How questions fluently. - Learn some languages: How far is it......from ....to ..? It is ........... b. Skill Ss speak in groups and in pairs. Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing c. Education Ss are educated to speak English correctly 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books, tools, extra-boards, visual aids, tapes, a stereo.. b. Students Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools… 3. Procedure * Organization (1’): greeting “Who’s absent today?” a. Checking up ( 4’ ) : - Qs: ask & answer with: 1- What’s your name? 2- How old are you? 3- How far is it from your house to school? - Keys: 1- My name’s... 2- I’m 14/13… 3- It’s about 2/3 kilometers. - Forms of checking: speaking. - T corrects & gives them marks. b- New lesson: Teacher’s activities Ss’ activities A- Presentation : 5’ - Listen to the T - Repeat in 1. Pre- teach : T presents some new words : chorally – - far ( adj) : xa ( example) individually - distance( n) : kho¶ng c¸ch ( explanation) - Copy down. - movie theater (n) : r¹p chiÕu phim ( explanation) - means of transport (n) ( explanation) - Match words. * Check: Matching. 2. Presentation dialogue : 12’ - Give short < B4 – p. 16,17 > answers: a)12 - Comprehension qs: a) – Where does Hoa live? Tran Hung Dao b)- Is it far from school? street. b).... c)... c) – How does she get there ? - Listen & work in pairs 3’ * Model sentences : < B5 – p. 17 > - Run through all - T: How far is it from your house to school? the cues. Ss: It is about one kilometer from my house to school. 16’ T - the whole A- Practice: word cues drill. class - T runs through all the cues. - Half- half - T asks ss to practice in exchange : - Open pairs. a) – The market / school / 2 kilometers..

(10) b) – The post office / bank / 7 kilometers. c) – The bus stop / movie theater / 3 kilometers. Example exchange: How far is it from the market to school? – It’s about 2 kilometers.. - Close pairs.. Eg:. A: How far is it from your house to the market ? B: It is about 3 km A: How do you go there? B: I go there by bike. How far is it from your house to the post office? A: It is about... c. Consolidation : - Retell the way to ask & answer about distance. d. Homework : - Learn by heart the new words - Do the exercises in B3, 4 – p.6,7 –workbook .. WEEK 2:. Preparing date: 25 / 8 / 2010 Period 6. Ask Ss ask & answer about real situations Ss practice freely 2’ 2’. - Retell: How far...? - Copy down homework.. Teaching date: 28 / 8 / 2010. 28 / 8 / 2010. Unit 1: Back to school Lesson 5: b 6,7.. 1. Objective. a. Knowledge. When finish lesson Ss can use “How far” questions and answers with “kilometers / meters” to talk about distance. - Ask and answer about the distance, mean of transpost; practice with their partner by using Wh- questions; How questions fluently. - Revise some languages: How far is it......from ....to ..? It is ........... b. Skill Ss speak in groups and in pairs. Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing c. Education Ss are educated to speak English correctly 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books, tools, extra-boards, visual aids, tapes, a stereo.. b. Students Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools… 3. Procedure * Organization (1’): greeting “Who’s absent today?” a. Checking up ( 4’ ) : - Qs: Have Ss ask and answer about the distance - Answer S1: How far is it from your house to school ? S2: It is about 3 km.

(11) How far is it from your house to the post office? S1: It is 1 km. - Forms of checking: speaking. - T corrects & gives them marks. b. New lesson: Teacher’s activities * Warm up Have Ss play jumble words games T check and give mark b. New lesson * Pre-listen Show the map ask Ss look at and defite the places T ask some question T: - Is lan’s house near the school -Is it near the market? * While-listen T explains the exercise T plays the tape once. Call Ss give answers T plays the tape more to check 6. Listen and write 1- From school to Lan’s house:300m 2-From Lan’s house to the post office:700m 3-From schooto the movie:3km 4-from movie theater to the post office:2km * Post – listen Have Ss look at the answer then ask and answer about the distance. T goes to help Ask Ss ask & answer about real situations *Production T shows the cards to introduce T asks some model questions T: What’s your name ? T: Where do you live? T goes to help Survey < B7 – p.18 > Name Nam Lan Hoa address Ha village distance 2 kilometers transport by bike Ex: T: Where do you live? Ss: I live in Ha village. T: How far is it from your house to school?. 4’. 5’. Ss’ activities Ss play in groups H T A R E T E theater SPOTFFCEIO post office. Ss look and say Ss:Yes , it is Ss: No,it is not.. 13’ Play the tape once Ss listen and defite Ss listen and note Ss compair with partner. Ss listen to check. 7’ Ss practice in pair Ss practice aloud Others listen to give remark. Ss practice freely 8’ Ss look & listen Ss read the cards Ss listen to answer Ss My name is Nam. Ss: I live in... Ask Ss ask & Answer to complete the card Call Ss read the card then T may check.

(12) Ss: It’s about 2 kilometers. T: How do you go to school? Ss: by bike. c. Consolidation : - Retell the way to ask & answer about distance. d. Homework : - Learn by heart the new words - Do the exercises B in workbook .. - Retell: How far...? 1’ - Copy down homework. 2’. WEEK 3:. Preparing date: 24 / 8 / 2010 Period 7. Teaching date: 30 / 8 / 2010. 04 / 9 / 2010. Unit 2: personal information Lesson 1: a 1 - 2.. 1.Objective a.Knowledge Through lesson, help Ss how to give the telephone numbers By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read telephone number, ask and give the telephone numbers, then further practice in address well. * Content of language: Vocab: Cardinal number, address, soon, to call, telephone directory, and telephone numbers … Structure: What is your telephone number? - 9432235. Where do you live? Or What is your address? I’ll call you soon. b. Skill Ss speak in pairs; Listen and copy the telephone numbers; Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing c. Education Ss are educated to speak English correctly. 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books, tools, extraboards, visual aids, pictures, a tape, a stereo, poster… b. Students Books, notebooks, studying tools, workbook… 3. Procedure * Organization (1’): greeting “Who’s absent today?” a. Checking up (3’): - Question: How far is it from your house to school? – S1 - Answer: It’s about ....kilometer(s) – S2 S3: write vocabulary..

(13) - Forms of checking: speaking, writing. - T corrects and gives them marks. b. New lesson: Teacher’s activities  Warm up : “ Bingo” -T presents how to play this game : * Distance / movie theater / family name / friends / address / different / unhappy. - Find out the winner. I- Presentation : 1. Pre – teach: T explains some new words.  call somebody (n) : gọi cho ai đó ( explanation)  personal ( adj) : thuéc vÒ c¸ nh©n ai ( explanation)  information (n) : th«ng tin ( translation). 3’. 8’. * I’ll call you soon.(Dùng hứa hẹn ai để gọi điện sớm). Name Lan Dung. Address. 14’. T--> W.c - Side – side -Open pairs --> close pairs. - Listen & write telephone numbers.. 7’. 6’. Telephone numbers. Ex: S1: What’s your telephone number, Lan? S2: 8262 091. S1: Where do you live? S2: I live........... c. Consolidation : -Retell the way to ask about one’s telephone number by using “What’s your / his / her telephone number?”. - Listen to the T - Repeat in chorally, and then do individually. - Copy down. - Listen to the T. -Repeat in chorus. T --> W.c Side --> side - Open pairs - Close pairs. 2. Presentation text : A1 < p. 19 > T presents new sentence : give model sentences.  What is your / his / her telephone number?  865. 732. * Get feedback : II- Practice : ** Word cue drill : - T runs through all cues. - Practice in exchange : Ex: S1: What is his telephone number? ( Nam / 864534) S2: 864 534.  An / 7345 610  Ba / 6351 793  Bang / 8237 041  Bao / 8521 936 A2 : listen and write telephone numbers : T plays the tape 3 times, asks ss to listen to the tape and write numbers they hear. * Get feedback ; a) 8251 654 d) 8351 793 b) 8250 514 e) 8237 041 c) 8521 936 f) 8821 652 III- Further practice: -T asks Ss work in pairs. What is your / his / her telephone number? 865. 732. IV-Production: Survey – p. 20. -Ask ss to ask their classmates & complete the list :. Ss’ activities -Ss write 3or 4 words. - Listen 7 titles read if Ss have the same words – please say “Bingo”. 2’. -Listen & practice in pairs.. - Work in pairs to complete the list given.. Some Ss to retell the main points of this.

(14) d. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary / new structures. - Do the exercise in A1, 2 – workbook. - Write the short passage about a new student after asking her/his information.. WEEK 3:. Preparing date: 01 / 9 / 2010 Period 8. 1’. lesson. Copy down homework.. Teaching date: 04 / 9 / 2010. / / 2010.. Unit 2: personal information Lesson 3: a 3,6,7 1. The objectives. a. Knowledge Through lesson, Ss can be able to read the dialogue between Han and Phong. - Understand the dialogue and answer the questions correctly. - Practice using the simple future b. Skill Ss complete dialogue , practice speaking, reading & listening c. Education Ss are eduducated to speak English correctly 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboards,visual aids,pictures,a tape,a stereo.. b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools… 3. Procedure * Organization: Greeting, “Who’s absent today?” (1’) a. Checking up + warm up : (5’) - Ask ss to make questions and answers: What / do /? – I / my / homework/ next Sunday morning. - Keys: - What will you do? I do my homework next Sunday morning. - Forms of checking: writing..

(15) - Ss Work in pairs - T corrects and gives them marks. Lan: I live........... II- Reading : 1. Pre- reading : ( T / F statements ) - T gives a poster with 5 sentences. - T asks ss to predict T / F. a) Phong calls Lan, b) Han is phong’s sister. c) Lan’s out when Phong calls her. d) Lan’ll be back at 5 o’clock. e) Phong’ll call Lan after 6 o’clock. - T gets feedback : a- T ; b- F ; c- T ; d- F ; e- T 2. While – reading : - Ask ss to read the dialogue again to answer the questions. - T corrects and gets feedback : a) Phong is calling. b) Han is answering the phone. c) They are talking about Lan. d) She will be back at about 6 o’clock. e) Phong will call her again after 6. 3. Post- reading : ( Role play) - Ask ss to work in pairs to make the similar dialogue. - T gets feedback. - Play with words: Will you come to my party? c. Consolidation : T says again the dialogue. d. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary. - Prepare the lesson for the next lesson.. 7’. 10’. - Guess T or F - Read & guess T/F - Give answers - Read & check - Copy down - Ss predict T/F? - Read & answer the questions - Side - side to read.. 8’ - Work in pairs 2’. 1’. - Listen to the T & some Ss retell the main points. -Copy down homework..

(16) WEEK 4:. Preparing date: Period 9. / / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 2: personal information Lesson 2: a 4 - 5.. 1. The objectives. a. Knowledge. Through lesson Ss can be able to understand “What- questions” to talk about sure events in the future by using “will” in positive statements and practice “will” with “Whquestions” well. - Talk about telephone number ,ask & answer about the telephone number b. Skill Ss complete dailogue , practice speaking, reading & listening c. Education Ss are eduducated to speak English correctly 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books, tools, extraboards, visual aids, pictures, a tape, a stereo.. b. Students Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools… 3. Procedure * Organization: greeting “Who’s absent today?”. (1’) -greeting a. Checking up + warm up : (7’) - Ask ss to do A2 (a,b). - work in pairs Eg; Nam: Excuse me Hai ! Hai: Yes Nam ? Nam:What your telephone number? Hai: 8 234 432 Nam: Thanks ,I’ll call you soon. - Jumbled words: 1. vomei -.> movie; 2. rehatte --> theater; 3. pletloehe -> telephone ; 4. lcal -> call ; 5. nuhpayp -> unhappy. * Keys : a )A – x ; B – v b)A – v ; B – x b. New lesson : Teacher’s activities I- Presentation : 1. Pre – teach: Vocabulary: T presents some new words . - (to) meet : gÆp ( translation) - free (adj) : r¶nh rçi ( antonym ) - (to) start : b¾t ®Çu ( antonym) - great (adj) : tuyÖt ( translation) - Can I speak to...? : T«i cã thÓ nãi chuyÖn víi ...? - Who’s calling? : Ai đang gọi đấy?. SS’ activities 5’. - Listen & repeat in chorally ,then do individually. -Match words..

(17) 7’. 2. Presentation dialogue : -Ask ss to predict what they will talk. Tam Phong. - Comprehension questions : A4 – p.21 - Ask ss to predict the answers * Keys : a) Phong & Tam b) They will see a movie. c) They’ll meet at 6.45. d) They’ll meet in front of the movie theater. 5’ 3. Model sentence: T sets the scene and gives model sentences:  Where will we meet?  We’ll meet in front of the movie theater. Practice in exchange : Concept check : *Meaning: Chóng ta sÏ gÆp nhau ë ®©u? – Chóng ta sÏ gÆp nhau ë tríc r¹p chiÕu phim. * Form: -Where + will + S + V? - S + will + V + Prep + place. * Use: to express what will happen in the simple future tense. * Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentence. II- Practice : word cue drill : 10’ - T helps ss run through the cues : a) Where / meet /? (in the street ) b) What / see /? ( a film ) Ex: Where will we meet? We’ll meet in the bookshop. Call some pairs to practice A4- P.21. III- Production: A5- P.21 – Listening. 8’ - Ask ss to fill information in the form after 3 times they hear.  Telephone number: 8 545 545.  They will see: a movie.  They will meet at: Lan’s house.  They will go by: bus. * Get feedback. c. Consolidation : T asks ss to say again the model of the simple future tense with Wh- qs. d. Homework : - Learn by heart vocabulary. - Do the exercises 1-> 5. WEEK 4:. Preparing date: Period 10. / / 2010. They are Tam and Phong - Phone number: ......... - Copy down. - Translate. - Copy down.. - Run through the cues. T -> w.class Side->side Open pairs -> close pairs -Listen to the tape 3 times - To fill in the form.. -Give their answers. 1’. - Retell the main points of this lesson. 1’. - Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010.

(18) Unit 2: personal information Lesson 4: b1, 2, 3, 9. My birthday 1. The aims a. Knowledge Through lesson students can talk about ordinal numbers, dates of a month & the names of the months in a year & understand & remember names of the dates in a month; the names of the months in a year fluently. b. Skill Ss develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing numbers, months.. c. Education Ss are educated to speak English correctly 2. Preparation a.Teacher Books, tools, extraboards, visual aids, pictures, a tape, a stereo.. b. Students Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools… 3. Procedure * Organization: greeting, “Who’s absent today?” (1’) a. Checking Previous lesson (5’) - Ask 2 Ss to practice: *Question Ask & answer about personal information *Answer How far is it from your house to...........? It’s.......km How do you go to school? By ...... Where is your house ?It’s near/.... What is your family /middle name? It’s......... What is your telephone number ? It’s........ Will you come to my party? - Correct and give Ss marks. b. New lesson: Teacher’s activities I- The dates of a month < B1, 2 >. 1) Listen and repeat : - From 1st to 31st - Play the tape 3 times. 2) Listen and write : - T has a poster of the dates. - T plays the tape. - T corrects gets feedback :  the first of July (July the first)  the nineteenth  the sixth. Ss’ activities 16’ - Listen and repeat in chorally - Copy down. - Listen and write the dates. -Work individually..

(19)  the fourteenth  the seventeenth II- The names of the month in a year : 1. January 5. May 9. September 2. February 6. June 10. October 3. March 7. July 11. November 4. April 8. August 12. December - T rubs out some months. - T corrects. III- Play with words : < B. 9 > - T reads first :  September / April / June / November : 30 days  February: 28 or 29 days.  January / March / May / July / August / October / December : 31 days c. Consolidation: -T retells the dates of a month and the names of the months in a year. d. Homework : - Learn by heart the dates; the names of the months in a year. - Do the exercises 1, 2, 3 – P.10 , 11 in workbook.. WEEK 4:. Preparing date: Period 11. / / 2010. 13’ - Write the names of the months in order. - Read aloud in chorally. - Try to remember and write the rubbed words 7’ - Work individually. - Listen - Read aloud. Repeat & remember. 2’. 1’. - Some Ss retell the main points of this lesson. Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 2: personal information Lesson 5: b4, 5. My birthday. 1. The objectives a. Knowledge Through lesson Ss will continue to practice the simple future tense to talk about the date of birth, ask & answer about the date of birth fluently, and some language:nervous, worried, birthday, date of birth, it is very nice. b. Skill Ss develop 4 skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing; work in pairs to practice dailogue, read & answer the questions, complete the form… c. Education Ss are eduducated to love the subject. 2.Preparation a. Teacher Books, textbook, pictures, sub- board, Radio, CD... b. Students Book, notebook, workbook, studying tools….

(20) 3.Procedure * Organization (1’): greeting “Who’s absent today?” a. Checkingthe old lesson(4’) *Question. Ask Ss to say about ordinal numbers, names of the months. *Answer Ex January, February, March, April, May,... The second of December, … -Teacher corrects and gives them marks. b. New lesson T’s Activities * Warm up - Greetings. -Have Ss play a game called Lucky numbers. 1) What’s your family name? 2) How old are you? 3) LN 4) What’s your address? 5) What’s your telephone number? 6) What’s your date of birth? 7) LN 8) Who do you live with? 9) How old will you be on your next birthday? 10) LN - Remark and lead in new lesson. 1) Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the picture about Mr. Tan and Hoa. Then ask ss to guess what Mr. Tan is asking Hoa. - Call on some ss to answer. - Ask ss to listen to the tape and give the information. - Explain some new words: + Nervous ( adj) : lo l¾ng, bån chån (explanation) + To worry(v) : lo l¾ng ( example) + Worried ( adj ) : lo l¾ng - Ask ss to read in chorus and individually.  Checking: What and where. - Play the tape for ss to listen again. - Ask ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask ss to look at the questions and work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Call on one student to go to the board and write the answers. - Correct and ask ss to copy down. * About you: - Ask a student some questions in part about you. - Ask ss to work in pairs.. Ss’ Activities 6’. - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups. -Answer the questions.. - Listen. - Look at the picture and guess. 31’. - Answer. - Give the information: + Name. + Date of birth. + Address + Telephone number. - Listen and repeat in chorus and individually. - Copy down. - Work individually. - Play a game. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write the answers on the board. - Copy down. - Answer T’s questions. - Work in pairs..

(21) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. 2) Read the dialogue again. Then complete 7’ this form. - Ask ss to read the dialogue again and complete the form. - Ask ss to exchange the result with the partner. - Ask ss to work in pairs asking and answering about the information in the form. - Correct and ask Ss to complete the form in the notebooks. c. Consolidation: - Retell the content of the dialogue. d. Homework: - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 11 in workbook.. WEEK 5:. Preparing date: 10 / 9 / 2010 Period 12. 2’ 1’. - Practice in front of the class.. - Read the dialogue again. - Complete the form. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Two Ss to ask and answer in front of the class. - Copy down. - Retell the main points of this lesson. - Copy down homework.. Teaching date: 13 / 9 / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 2: personal information Lesson 6: b6, 7, 8. My birthday 1. The objectives. a. Knowledge Through lesson, Ss will be able to write an invitation card for a birthday party.. They will use the dates of the month fluently, and continue to learn about future simple tense to talk about birthday and some language: The party will be at...... b. Skill Ss work in pair to practice dailogue, write an invitation. Develop 4 skills: listening, speaking and writing. c. Education Ss are eduducated to love the subjects. 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboards,visual aids,pictures,a tape,a stereo.. b. Students.

(22) Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools… 3. Proceduce * Organization (1’): Greeting. Who’s absent today? a. Checking Previous lesson(3’) *Question Aks 2 ss to aks and answer about their date of birth. - T corrects and gives marks. *Answer. What is one’s date of birth? It’s on + month + the date It’s on the date of month T’s Activities * Warm up : - Ask ss to play a game : Networks Things to buy on birthday. Ss’ Activities 4’. - Play a game in 2 groups.. cakes. - Call on 2 ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write. - Remark and lead in new lesson. b. New lesson: I. Read. Then complete the card. 7’ 1. Vocabulary: * T presents some new words: - birthday party: tiệc sinh nhËt ( picture ) - to invite (v) : mêi ( situation ) - invitation card (n ):giÊy mêi ( realia ) - to finish (v) = to end ( synonym ) - to join (v) = to take part in ( synonym ) - fun ( n) : sù vui vÎ, cuéc vui ( translation) * Checking: Rub out and remember. 5’ ** Pre – writing: - Ask ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions: + What is Lan doing? + What are they doing in the picture? -T gets feedback. 15’ II. While- writing: 1- Ask ss to read the text about Lan and find out the answers to the question: + How old is she now? + Where does she live? + When is her birthday? + When will the party start and finish? - Call on some ss to answer the questions. - Call on some ss to read the text aloud. - Ask ss to look at the invitation card of Lan and then complete it, using the information from the text. - Ask ss to compare the result with the partner. - Call on some ss to read the completed card aloud. - Correct the mistake and ask ss to write in the notebooks. * Key: Complete the invitation card to Lan’ party:. Discuss in groups.. - Go to the board and write.. - Listen and repeat in chorus and individually. - Copy down.. - play a game. -Look at the picture and answer the question in individual. - Read the text and find the answers for the questions in individually. - Read the text aloud - Complete the invitation card -Compare with the partner - Read aloud..

(23) Dear ......., I.....on Sunday, May2th.The party ......at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street from 5.OO to 9.OO Love Lan Tell:8 674 758. - Write an invitation. - Exchange the writing with the partner. - Read aloud.. 2- Now write an invitation card to your birthday party. - Aks ss to write an invitation to their birthday party based on part 6. - Ask ss to exchange their writing with the partner. - Call on some ss to read their invitation in front of the class. - Remark. III - Post- writing: T asks Ss to answer qs in B7(pw) then practice in class T guides Ss to write an invitation to their birthday party like B6 T call Ss to read invitation & correct if need T checks then give the right answer *Think & write :What will you do at Lan’s birthday party. a,I’ll give Lan........ b,by (bike). c,I’ll play......... d,I’ll eat........... e,I’ll drink....... f,I’ll live at....... c. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to look at remember and repeat again. d. Homework: - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. Learn by heart part remember. - Do exercise 4,5 on page 12 in workbook.. WEEK 5:. Preparing date: 14 / 9 / 2010. 6’. Ss present & correct if need Ss listen & write(or write at home) Ss copy again at home. 3’ 1’. - Repeat. - Copy down homework. Teaching date: 17/ 9 / 2010..

(24) / / 2010. Period 13. Unit 3: at home Lesson 1: a1.What lovely home 1. The objectives a. Knowledge Through lesson Ss can read the dialogue between Hoa and Lan fluently to know the furniture in Hoa’s house . They revise (there is/ there are) Ss learn some languages : What a lovely living room !... b. Skill Ss work in pair to practice dailogue, listen, read, write & speak. c. Education Ss are eduducated to love the subject. 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids,pictures,a tape,a stereo.. b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools,prepare the new lesson 3. Procedure * Organization: greeting, “Who’s absent today?” (1’) a. Checking Previous lesson(4’) * Questions -Read your invitation card & answer 1,When is your birthday? 2,Who will you invite on your next birthday? 3,What time will you start ? 4,Where will you have your birthday? *Answers Read the invitation card & answer 1, It’ on .................... 4, It’ll start at................ 2, I’ll invite ................. 5, It’ll start( at my house/.............) b. New lesson : T’s Activities warm up (5’): ask ss to play a game (Networks) bathroom. Ss’ Activities Ss play a game. kitchen. - Call on 2 ss to go to the board and write down. - Remark and give them marks. 1.Pre- teach : - Vocabulary :( 5’) teacher explains some - Listen and repeat in chorus – * New words. individual. - awful ( adj ) : kinh khñng, tåi tÖ ( situation) - Copy down. - comfortable ( adj ):tho¶i m¸i , dÔ chÞu( antonym).

(25) - sink ( n ) : bån röa ( picture ) - tub ( n ) : bån t¾m ( picture ) - dryer (n) : m¸y sÊy (realia ) - dish washer (n) : máy rửa bát đĩa ( translation - electric stove (n): bÕp ®iÖn ( picture)  Checking : Rub out and remember *Dialogue :True / false repetition drill: ( 8’) -T has some sentences: some T or some F -T reads the sentence: a. There are some chairs. b. There is a TV. c. There is a bed. d. There is a sink. e. There is a shower. f. There is a washing machine. * Deliberate mistakes: ( 8’) - Ask ss to look at the kitchen picture on p.30. - T reads: This is the picture of a kitchen. The T.V is next to the refrigerator. There is a washing machine between the dish washer and the electric stove. There is a dining table with 5 chairs. Beside the washing machine is a tub. + Answer key: television--> dishwasher ; washing machine--> sink tub--> dryer + Questions: ( 5’) a. They talk about living room, bathroom and kitchen. b. Because Lan’s room is bright. c. There are a sink, a tub and a shower. d. There is washing machine, dryer.... * Chain game: ( 6’) - Ask ss to work in group of 5 to talk about the furniture in picture. Ex: S1: there is a television. S2: there is a television in the ling room. There is a cat............ c. Consolidation: ( 2’) - Teacher says the content of the dialogue again, retell the ways to use “There is / There are”. d. Homework:( 1’ ) - Learn by heart the new words. - Do exercise 1 (p.13- work book).. WEEK 6:. Preparing date: 17 / 9 / 2010 Period 14. - Rewrite words. - Ss listen to the teacher. - If sentences are true, ss will repeat. - If sentences are false, ss will keep silent. - Look at the picture and listen to the teacher to find out the right place of things.. - Give answer keys. -Work in pair to ask and answer 4 questions. - Work in groups of 5 to say: s1-->s2-->s3.... - Retell the main points of this lesson.. - Copy down homework. Teaching date: 20/ 9 / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 3: at home Lesson 2: a2,3.What lovely home.

(26) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge Through lesson Ss can make exclamation: What + a / an + adj + n!(What + N !):make complaints and compliments. Ss learn some languages : . Is there...,Are there........ b. Skill Ss work in pair to practice, develop 4 skills; listen, speaking, reading and writing. c. Education Ss are eduducated to speak English correctly,clearly. 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures.... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools… 3. Proceduce Teacher’s activities * Organization: greeting “Who’s absent today? ”(1’) a. Checking up (4’) -Ask ss to work in pair: one asks, the other answers by using: Is there a / an .......? Are there any.......? in the picture on page 31. - T corrects and gives them marks. b. New lesson : 1/ Pre – teach: (7’) *Vocabulary: T presents some new words. - Awful( adj ) = Terrible : kinh khñng, tåi tÖ (explanation) - expensive ( adj ) >< cheap : đắt ( antonym ) - bad ( adj ) >< good : xÊu ( antonym ) - boring ( adj ) : buån rÇu, tÎ nh¹t ( example ) - delicious( adj ) : ngon ( translation) - comfortable ( adj ) : tho¶i m¸i ( translation) - convenient ( adj ) : thuËn tiÖn (translation) - modern ( adj ) : hiện đại (translation)  Check: matching. 2/ Grammar : Exclamations (5’) T sets the scene :. Lan Hoa: What an awful day! This is my bedroom.. Hoa. Ss’ activities - Greeting. -Work in pair.. - Listen and repeat in chorus – individual. - Copy down.. - Match words. - Listen and repeat in chorusindividually..

(27) Lan: What a bright bedroom! - Rub out and remember dialogue.  Concept check : + Meaning: translate into Vietnamese. + Use: to give one’s complaining and compliment. + Form: What + a / an + adj + n! + Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentence. 3/ Practice: word cues dill.(17’) - T runs through the cues. * kitchen / amazing * dress / expensive * restaurant / awful * dinner/ delicious * party / boring - T and ss correct together 4 / Production : ( writing )(6’) - T hangs 5 cues on the board and ask ss to rewrite what they have done. - T walks round and does direct corrections. c- Consolidation (3’) T says again how to make the exclamations : What + a / an + adj + n ! d- Homework (2’) Ask ss to do exercise 2 on page 13 – workbook. - Translate - Give use and form.. - T – whole class - Half – half - Open pairs. - Close pairs.. - Rewrite.. - Retell the main points of this lesson - Copy down homework.. WEEK 6:. Preparing date: Period 15. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Unit 3: at home. / / 2010. / / 2010.

(28) Lesson 3: b1,2. Hoa’s family 1. The aims a. Knowledge Through lesson Ss can understand the text and practice how to ask and answer the questions about the jobs. Help ss read a text for main ideas, details and job vocabulary. -Learn some language: What do/does + S + do/work? b. Skill -Ss work in pair to practice dialogues. Develop 4 skills: L, R, S, &W c. Education - Ss are dedicated to speak English correctly. 2. Preparation a. Teacher - Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids, pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students -Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools… 3. Procedure *Organization: greeting,“ Who’s absent today ?” (1’). -. -. Teacher’s activities a. Checking up + warm up : T asks ss to say about complaints and compliments by word cues given :( amazing / living room), (lovely/ house). T corrects and gives them marks. b. New lesson : I/ Pre- reading :( Vocabulary ) a) Pre – teach: T elicits some new words. (to) raise : nu«i ( gia sóc) ( translation) (to) grow : trång ( translation) (to) take care of : ch¨m sãc ( situation) journalist (n) : nhµ b¸o ( explanation) newspaper (n): tê b¸o ( realia) hospital (n) : bÖnh viÖn ( situation) primary school(n) : trêng cÊp I ( explanation)  Check: Matching. b) T / F statement prediction : T asks ss to guess T/ F statement predictions. 1. Hoa’s father is a worker. 2. Her mother does the housework and helps on the farm. 3. Her sister is ten. 4. Lan’s father takes care of sick children. 5. Her mother is a doctor. 6. Her brother works on a farm. * T asks ss to give their predictions : II- While – reading : T lets ss read the text carefully and check them predictions. - T asks ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - T gets feedback.. Ss’ activities 5’. 8’. 6’. - Individual action.. - Listen and repeat in chorus- individually. - Copy down.. - Matching - Predict T/ F . - Give their prediction - Work in pairs. 5’ - Listen & read the text in silent. - Work in pairs..

(29) 1- F ; 2 - T ; 3 - F ; 4 - T ; 5 - F ; 6 – F * Comprehension questions : Questions : a-> f – P. 34 ( noughts and crosses) T introduces the way to play: divide the class into 2 teams. Ask ss to play in 10 minutes. a e i. h b d. c f g. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. - Play the game in two teams. - Answer the questions. g) What does Lan’s father do? h) Does her mother teach in school? i) What is her brother’s job? - T finds the winners. III- Post – reading : - T asks ss to discuss about Lan’s family, and then ss have to talk about their family. c. Consolidation : - Retell the content of the lesson: Lan’s family and ss’ families. d. Homework : - Learn by heart the new words. - Do the exercises B1,2 – P. 15,16 ( Workbook ) -Prepare for next lesson.. WEEK 6:. 10’. 7’ 2’ 1’. - Talk about Lan’s family, their families - Retell the main points of this lesson. - Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. Period 16. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 3: at home. Lesson 4: b3,4.Hoa’s family 1. Objectives a. Knowledge -Through lesson Ss can be able to use comparatives & superlatives of irregular adjectives fluently, and then they can apply in their life. - Describes the work of some jobs : doctor, journalist, teacher... - Ss learn some words : take care of, teach write for...... - Listen & complete the forms for Tom, Susan & Bill. They know more (comparatives & superlatives of irregular adjectives & long adjectives). b. Skills -Ss work in pair ,groups to practice speaking,listen & complete the cards. Develop 4 skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing. c. Education -Ss are eduducated to speak English correctly. 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures.... b. Students.

(30) Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities * Organization: - Greeting, Who’s absent today? a. Checking up & warm up :. 1’ 5’. SS’ activities Greeting - Guess the jobs - Work in groups of 4.. - Ask ss to play a game: Guess the jobs. + You go to see a person when you have a toothache. + This person writes for a newspaper or magazine. + Before a house is built, this person draws the plan for it. + This person grows vegetables & raises cattle. ……. 3’. - T corrects & gives them marks. - Perform smth about their families. - One by one. b. New lesson : I. Revision: - Ask ss to talk about their families.. 10’ - Listen to the T & repeat - Read in chorus - Predict Tom, Susan , Bill’s ages , jobs, places of work - Work in pairs.. Ex: My father is 40 years old. He’s a worker. He works in a factory… B. Pre- listening : *. Pre- teach :- T presents some new words: + a high school : trêng n¨ng khiÕu ( explanation ) + a magazine : t¹p chÝ (realia)  Open prediction : Name Age Job Tom 26 teacher Susan 19 Journalist Bill 20 nurse - T gets feedback.. Place of work at a high school for a magazine in a hospital. 15’ - Listen & check -Work individually.. II. While – listening : * Ask ss to listen to the T carefully & check their. - Play the game in 2 teams.. predictions. - T gives answer keys.. - Do individually. *PELMANISM : - T explains the way to play.. 8’.

(31) a farmer a doctor takes care of works on a. a teacher writes for a. a journalist teaches in a. newspaper. school. 2’. - Use the grid to talk about Tom, Susan, Bill again :. 1’. sick people farm - T controls the game.. - Retell the main points of this lesson. Some Ss to retell.. III. Post – Listening : Eg : Tom is 26 years old. He’s a teacher. He teaches at a high school. c. Consolidation :. - Copy down homework. - Work individually.. - Retell the content of the lesson: talk about one’s job ; working place. d. Homework : - Do the exercise B1- P.15 < workbook > - Learn by heart vocabulary and the main points of this lesson. - Prepare for next lesson.. WEEK 6:. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 17. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 3: at home. Lesson 5: b5,6.Hoa’s family 1. The aims a. Knowledge - Through lesson Ss can use the structures and practice a dialogue fluently and answer questions & revise and learn more about comparations.... Understand the comparatives and superlatives of irregular and long adjectives. practice b. Skill - Ss practice dialogues in pair and work in groups to complete a letter c. Education - Ss are eduducated to speak, write English correctly , love subject... 2. Preparation a. Teacher - Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures, a tape , a stereo .... b. Students.

(32) -Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Proceduce Organization: Greeting, “Who’s absent today?”(1’) a.Checking Previous lesson (15’). *.Question: ? Write a passage about you, your parents or Hoa’s family?( about 60 words) -What is your name?/ when is your birthday?/what do you do? how far.....? -What does your father /mother do?/Where does he /she work?/Are they busy? -What does Hoa’s father /mother do?/Where does he /she work?/Are they busy? - How old is Hoa’s sister?/what does she do?/which class is she in? *Answers -My name is...../my birthday is on....../I’m a student/It is.....km from.....to.....(2,5 ps) -My father/mother is a/an........;He/She works in.......:They are(not) busy...........(2,5 ps). -Hoa’s father/mother is a/an.........;He/She works in.....:They are(not) busy........(2,5 ps). -She is eight years old/she is a student/she is in class...../...........(2,5 ps) Teacher’s activities b. New lesson: 1. Pre – teach: T presents some new words. - empty ( adj) : (nhµ) cha cã ngêi ë (example ) - suitable ( adj) : phï hîp (translation) - expensive ( adj) : đắt ( antonym ) * Check: Rub out and Remember. 2. Grammar : Model sentences - T presents : a) The apartment at number 40 is better than number 30. It’s more expensive than number 30. b) The apartment at number 79 is the best. It’s the most expensive. - T asks ss to repeat. * Concept check : - Meaning: translate into Vietnamese. * Form: S1 + be + more + long adjective + than + S2 S + be + the most + long adjective. Ss’ activities 3’. 5’. - Listen & repeat - Copy down. - Give form.. -. Copy down Form and usage. Work individually. -. * Use: Comparatives and superlatives in irregular & long adjectives. - Pronunciation : * Remember : good – better – the best bad – worse – the worst * Presentation dialogue : - Ask ss to listen and read in pairs. - Call some pairs to read. 3. Practice : a) Picture drill ( 5 – p. 39, 40). - T runs through all the picture cues. - Ask ss to make sentences by using form. b)- Ask ss to complete the sentences by using word cues : + This ruler / long / that / ruler. + Mai / intelligent / Hoa. c) Comprehension questions :. - Listen to the T . - Repeat in chorusindividually. Retell and Copy down.. 2’. - Work in pairs. 10’ - Look at the picture cues & speak. - Complete the sentences. - Work in pairs..

(33) - T lets ss read the dialogue again and answer the questions. * Key : a) The apartment at number 27 is the cheapest. b) The one at number 79 is the most expensive. c) The cheapest will be the best apartment. 4. Production : - Write the sentences with the superlatives. a) He / good student / class. b) Sydney/ big / Australia c. Consolidation : Retell: comparative – superlative. d. Homework: - Do the exercise 7 – p. 20< workbook >. - Learn by heart the model sentences and vocabulary.. -Work in pairs. 6’. 2’ 1’. - Do individually. - Retell the main points of this lesson. Copy down homework.. WEEK 7:. Preparing date: Period 18. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Language focus 1 1. The aims a. Knowledge - Through lesson Ss can understand the structures clearly and do exercises correctly. Help ss consolidate the knowledge that they’ve learnt from Unit 1 to Unit 3. b. Skill - Ss practice speaking, writing skills..... c. Education - Ss are eduducated to speak, write English correctly , love subject... 2. Preparation a. Teacher - Books, tools, extraboads, visual aids , pictures .... b. Students - Lessons, books, notebooks,s tudying tools , … 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities time Ss’ activities 1’ - Greeting * Organization: - Greeting. Who’s absent today? 5’ a. Checking up : - Complete these sentences by using - Do individually words given : + Lan / tall / Hoa + Minh / intelligent / Nam * Key: + Lan is taller than Hoa . - Copy down & + Minh is more intelligent than Nam. retell the use. - T corrects & gives them marks..

(34) b. New lesson : I. Tense : * The simple present tense : * Form: S + { be + O . {V(s, es) + O. * The simple future tense : * Form: S + will + V + O. - T asks ss to retell the use. * Drill: Exercise 1 & exercise 2 p.38. - T gets feedback. II. Prepositions of position :. 15’ Work individually. - Retell. 8’. - on : ë trªn - in front of : ở đằng trớc - under : ë bªn díi - behind : ở đằng sau - next to : bªn c¹nh. * Drill : Do exercise 4 p. 39 - Key: b, It’s in front of the chair. c, It’s behind the table. d, It’s next to the bookshelf. e, It’s on the sofa. 12’ III. Occupations : ( Exercise 6 – p.40 ) - Ask ss to play a game : Lucky numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. L.N 2. a fireman 3. a teacher 4. a farmer 5. a doctor 6. a worker 7. L.N 8. a truck driver 9. L. N 10. a student - Find out the winner. c. Consolidation : 2’ - Retell the content of the lesson d. Homework : 2’ - Re-do all exercises in the notebooks. - Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar - Prepare for next lesson.. - Listen & check. - Work individually.. - Play game in 2 teams.. - Clap their hands.. - Retell the main points. - Re-do all the exercises at home. - Copy down homework..

(35) WEEK 7:. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 19. / / 2010. / / 2010. Written test 1. The objectives a. Knowledge Through the test T check how Ss studied and T will have suitable methods in the future b. Skill Ss are check writing, reading speaking skills.... c. Education Ss do the test themselves 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Copies of test,teaching plan. b. Students: Learn the lessons, studying tools , … 3. Procedure CHỦ ĐỀ Language focus - Simple future tense - Simple present tense - Prepositions - Vocab Listen Read Write Tổng. NHẬN BIẾT TNKQ TL 10. TH¤NG HIỂU TNKQ TL. VẬN DỤNG TNKQ TL. TỔNG. 4. 14. 5. 5 5 4. 5 4 4. 4. 15. 2. 9 4. 4 4. I.. 10 28. 2. 10. Questions (44’). I: Listen to the pasages about Lan, Hoa and Quan and complete the table( 1,5 points) Name Lan Hoa Quan. Age Job Hobby (1)............... student (2).......................... 12 (3)........................ watching TV 11 student (5)............................ II. Choose the best answer ( 2,5 points) 1. Nice to …… you, Hoa. a. meets b. happy 2. She has …… friends in Hue.. phone number 8 574 593 (4)..................... 9 321 840. c. meet.

(36) a. a lot b. a lot of c. lot of 3. How is everything? - ………. a. So am I b. Me, too c. Ok 4. Her ……. is Pham Thi Hoa. a. full name b. middle c. family 5. ……… is it from your house to school? a. How b. How far c. How long 6. I …… call you soon. a. will b. do c. am 7. Where will we meet? – We’ll …… in front of the movies. a. meet b. meeting c. meets 8. Can I speak …… Lan?. a. with b. from c. to 9. What is your date of birth? - The..............of December. a. one b. first c. firsth 10....................... there any books on the table ? a. Are b. Is c. Do III. Read and answer the questions( 2 points) Hoa is a student in class 7A. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao Street with her uncle and aunt. She has a closed friend, Lan. Lan lives at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street. Hoa’s father is a farmer . He works on the farm . He work hard from morning till night. Lan’s mother is a housewife. She does the housework and helps on the farm . Hoa has a younger sister, she is shorter than Hoa, She is only eight years old. 1. Where does Hoa live ? ................................................................................................................................. ......... 2. What does Hoa’s father do ? ................................................................................................................................ ......... 3. Where does he work ? ................................................................................................................................ ........... 4. Is Hoa taller than her sister ? ................................................................................................................................ ......... 5. How old is Hoa’s sister ? ................................................................................................................................ .......... IV. Put the verbs in bracket into the correct form ( 2 points) 1. Listen! The girl (play)………………………… the piano. 2. They (go) …………………………to the English club every Saturday. 3. My father (travel) ………………………..to Nha Trang next week..

(37) 4. Hoa ( live) …………………... with her aunt and uncle in Hanoi. V. Complete the sentences using the present progressive tense ( 1 point) 1. Mai / play / piano / at the moment. -> _____________________________________________________________. 2. The boys / study / Math / now. -> _____________________________________________________________. VI. Complete the sentences. Use the comparatives to make( 1 point) 1. This ruler / long / that one. -> ___________________________________________________________. 2. Lan / beautiful / her sister. -> ___________________________________________________________. II. answer I. Listen: ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,3 điiểm) 1. 12 2. movies 3. student 4. 9 618 427 5. Fishing Lan is 12 year olds, she is a student. She likes seeing movie in her freetime. Her telephone number is 8 574 593. Hoa is a student, too. She is 12 years old. In her free time she watches TV. Her telephone number is 9 618 427 . Quan is 11 years old. He go to Quang trung school. He likes fishing in his free time. His telephone number is 9 321 840. II. Trắc nghiệm:( Mỗi ý đúng 0,25 điểm) 1-c 2.b 3. c 4.a 5. b 6.a 7.a 8.c 9.b 10. a III. Read:( Mỗi ý đúng 0,4 điểm) 1.She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao Street. 2.He is a farmer. 3.He works on the farm IV. Ngữ pháp:( mỗi ý đúng 0,5 điểm). 4. Yes, She is 5. She is eight years old. 1. Listen! The girl is playing the piano. 2. They go to the English club every Saturday. 3. My father will/ is going to travel to Nha Trang next week. 4. Hoa lives with her aunt and uncle in Hanoi. V. Write:( mỗi ý đúng 0,5 điểm). - 1. Mai is playing piano at the moment. 2. The boys are studying Math now. - 1. This ruler is longer than that one. 2. Lan is more beautiful than her sister. c. Homewords (1’) - Collect the test - Review all the knowledge in unit 1,2,3 & prepare for the new lesson.. WEEK 7:.

(38) Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 20. / / 2010. / / 2010. CORRECT THE TEST (45minutes) 1. The aims a. Knowledge. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know their ability to check the test compare with the the keys.Review all the knowledge which they’ve done in the test. b. Skills :Pupils train reading and speaking. c. Education: Making pupils more carefully. 2. Prepare. a. Teacher: Teaching plan. b. Pupils : Textbook, notebook, review all the knowledge in unit 1,2 & 3. 3. Procedure a.Check the old lesson( No) b. New lesson - Giáo viên trả bài, đưa ra đáp án và biểu điểm chi tiết. - Học xem bài và tự kiểm tra. 1. Nhận xột chung a, Ưu điểm: - Ss do the test themselves. - They can do all the test b, Nhược điểm -There are some Ss can’t do difficult questions or grammar questions because of their misunderstood. 2. Giải đáp thắc mắc I. Listen: ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,3 điiểm) 1. 12 2. movies 3. student 4. 9 618 427 5. Fishing Lan is 12 year olds, she is a student. She likes seeing movie in her freetime. Her telephone number is 8 574 593. Hoa is a student, too. She is 12 years old. In her free time she watches TV. Her telephone number is 4. 9 618 427 . Quan is 11 years old. He go to Quang trung school. He likes fishing in his free time. His telephone number is 9 321 840. II. Trắc nghiệm:( Mỗi ý đúng 0,25 điểm) 1-c 2.b 3. c 4.a 5. b 6.a 7.a 8.c 9.b 10. a III. Read:( Mỗi ý đúng 0,4 điểm) 1.She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao Street. 2.He is a farmer. 3.He works on the farm IV. Ngữ pháp:( mỗi ý đúng 0,5 điểm). 4. Yes, She is 5. She is eight years old. 1. Listen! The girl is playing the piano. 2. They go to the English club every Saturday. 3. My father will/ is going to travel to Nha Trang next week. 4. Hoa lives with her aunt and uncle in Hanoi. V. Write:( mỗi ý đúng 0,5 điểm). - 1. Mai is playing piano at the moment..

(39) 2. The boys are studying Math now. - 1. This ruler is longer than that one. 2. Lan is more beautiful than her sister. c. Homework. - Review all the knowledge which they’ve done in the test. - Prepare for the new lesson: Unit 4: At school ( A1,2). WEEK 8:. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Period 21. Unit 4: at school Lesson 1: a1,2,4. 1. The objectives a. Knowledge. - Help ss ask for & state the time, talk about school subjects, schedules & regulations. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen & talk about the school subjects, schedules & state the time fluently. Ss learn some languages : what time is it ?........... b. Skill. - Develop listening and speaking skills. c. Education Ss are eduducated to speak, correctly... 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools, a clock ,pictures, a tape , a stereo .... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure. T’s activities * Organization: - Greeting, “ Who’s absent today ? ”. 1’. Ss’activities - Greeting. a. Checking - up and warm- up :. 8’. - Play a game in 2. Revision – A1 – p.42.. * NOUGHT & CROSSES. - T explains the way to play this game.  Eg: S1: What time is it ?. teams..

(40) S2: It’s seven o’clock. 7.00 4.15 8.30 9.40 6.35 8.25 - Ask ss to play game in two teams.. 1.45 11.5 3.10. - Find out the winner.. b. New lesson : I. Presentation : * Pre – teach ( Vocabulary ) 6’. - Physics ( n ) : m«n vËt lý. ( realia ). - Physical education ( n ) : m«n thÓ dôc. (translation). - Listen & repeat in. - Music ( n ) : m«n ©m nh¹c. (explanation). chorus, then work individually. + It is.............. o’clock. + It is+ số phút past + số giờ To + It is giờ + phút + a quarter = 15 ms + half = 30ms. - Play in 2 teams. + Check :Slap the board Math Geography. music. physical education. physics. English. II. Practice : Picture drill ( A4 – p.43 ) - T runs through all the picture cues.. 17’. T – the whole class. - Run through the. Side – side. picture cues.. Open pairs -- > close pairs - Ask ss to ask and answer questions by using the present continues tense with Wh – Qs : Eg : S1 : What is Lan doing ?. - Work in pairs. S2 : Lan is studying physics. S1 : What time does Lan have her Physics class ? S2 : She has her physics class at 8.40. - T corrects their mistakes & pronunciation. III. Production : A2 – p. 42 - Ask ss to ask and answer about themselves with a partner.. 10’.

(41) Eg : S1 : What time do you get up ? S2 : I get up at (6.00) o’clock.. - Work in pairs. S1 : What time do classes start ? S2 : ………. - T corrects their mistakes. c. Consolidation : - Retell the content of the lesson: Wh-qs with the present. 2’. continuous tense , talk about Lan’s activities , practice saying the time.. - Retell the content. d. Homework :. of the lesson.. - Learn by heart the new words.. 1’. - Do the exercise A1,2 – Workbook. - Prepare for next lesson.. - Copy down homework.. WEEK 8:. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 22. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 4: at school Lesson 2: a3, 5. 1. The objectives a. Knowledge - Help ss listen for the details and school vocabulary. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to remember school vocabulary more with languages as: math , physic education... They can write their schedule correctly. b. Skill Ss practice 4 skills: S, L, R & W. c. Education Ss are educated to speak, correctly... 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures, a tape , a stereo .....

(42) b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure Teacher’s activities * Organization: - Greeting. - Who’s absent today? - How are you today? a. Checking up & warm up : 1- Ask ss to ask & answer the questions given.  What are you studying?  What time do you have your English class? 2- Revision: Word square . - Ask ss to find 11 hidden words about classes.. T 1’. Ss’ activities -Ss greet - The monitor answers. - Ss answer.. 8’ - Work in pairs. - S1 & S2 I’m studying English. .................................. . - Play game in 2 teams .. P I C T U R E S S H I S T O R Y T T Y S I C S N H A U S U X A B S W R D I M T N I X U T Y C O H L Y M A T H A M G E O G R A P L N C L A S S E S E D U C A T I O N - Get feedback : -> pictures, history , math , classes sixth , mom , start , study English Geography Physical education b- New lesson : I- Pre- listening :  Pre – teach : Vocabulary: T elicits some new words. + schedule ( n ) : thêi gian biÓu ( explanation) + important (adj ) : quan träng ( translation) + fun (a) : ( translation) - Check : Rub out & Remember  Open prediction : - Ask ss to predict 5 classes Thu has on Wednesday and Thursday. 1......... 2......... 3......... 4......... 5......... II- While – listening :  Ask ss to check their predictions Answer keys : 1- English 2- Math 3- Geography 4- Physical education 5- Music  Comprehension questions : - Ask ss to answer the questions in pairs : 1. When does Thu have English classes?. * Answer keys: -> picture, history , math , classes sixth , mom , start , study English Geography Music Physics , Physical education. 4’. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat in chorus . - Do individually. - Do individually.. 6’. 15’ - Listen & check their prediction. - Work in pairs to answer..

(43) 2. What time do they start? 3. What other classes does Thu have on Thursday? 4. What’s Thu’s favorite subject? Why? 5. What’s Hoa’s favorite subject? Why?.  A3- P.43 : Ask ss to listen &fill in the gaps with time and subject. Friday Keys : English : 7.00 Science : 9.40 Geography: 7.50 History : 10.30 Music : 8.40 Saturday Physical education : 1.00 English : 3.40 Math : 2.40 Science : 4.30 III- Post – listen. - Have Ss write their schedule the ask and answer about their schedule T goes to help Ask Ss practice aloud T checks if need c. Consolidation:. 1. On Wednesday & Thursday. 2. On Wednesday at 8.40, on Thursday at 9.40. 3. Math , Geography, Physical education and Physics. 4. History .It’s interesting & important. 5. Math. It’s difficult, but fun . - Listen & fill in the gaps < Do individually> - Do individually. Eg : English : 3.00. 8’ Ss work in small group Ss feed back. 2’. - Retell the main points of this lesson.. - Retell the contents of the lesson. d. Homework: 1’. - Learnt by heart vocabulary and some structure. - Copy down homework.. grammar. -. Prepare for next lesson.. WEEK 8:. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 23. Unit 4: at school Lesson 3: a6,7. 1. The objectives a. Knowledge. / / 2010. / / 2010.

(44) - Help ss read the details and compare an American school with a Vietnamese school. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to compare an American school with a Vietnamese school correctly. b. Skill Ss practice speaking , reading skills c. Education Ss are educated to speak, correctly... 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures, a tape , a stereo .... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Proceduce a. Checking the old lesson(5’) *. Questions ? Ask 2 Ss ask and answer about the time *. Answer S1: What time is it now ? S2: It is .............. S1: What time do you get up ? S2 : I get up at 6 o’clock. S1 : What time do you have English on Monday/..........? S2 : I have it at ........ Teacher’s activities * Organization: - Good afternoon ! - Who’s absent today?. T 1’. * Warm up : Revision. - Hang man -------- ( schedule ) ------- ( schools ) ------- ( classes ) Ask 2 ss to practice with : English – 1.15 Math – 2.05 Corrects and gives them marks b-New lesson : I- Pre- reading :  Pre – teach: vocabulary. - Presents some new words. + a uniform : bộ đồng phục ( example) + a break : giê nghØ gi¶i lao ( explanation) + a cafeteria: qu¸n ¨n tù phôc vô ( translation) + a snack : mãn ¨n nhÑ ( example) + (to) sell : b¸n ( translation). 6’. Ss’ activities - Ss greet - The monitor answers. - Do individually. S1: When do you have English class? S2: I have my English class at 1.15.. 5’ - Listen to the T. - Repeat in chorus. - Do individually. - Rewrite words.. + a 20 minutes break ( N) + Soccer = football (n).  Check : R & R  True / false prediction: A6 - p.45. - Ask ss to predict T or F. T hangs a poster. a- Students do not usually wear school uniform. b- There are classes on Saturday morning. c- Students don’t have a break in the afternoon. d- The school cafeteria sells food to students.. 4’ - Ss predict individually. a. T/ F b. ... c. ... d. ... e. ... f. ....

(45) e- The school cafeteria only spends at lunch time. f- Basketball is an unpopular after school activity. + Get feedback : II- While – reading : 5’ - Check ss predict. - Ask ss to check their predictions after reading the text - Copy down keys. “School in USA”. + Answer keys : a- T ; b- F ; c- F; d- T; e- F; f- F 9’ - Grid table with : USA Activities Vietnam -There is school uniform x v - Classes start at.... 8.30 7.00 3.30/4.0 -The school day ends at.... 11.00 x - There are lessons on v - Read the text again Saturday. v and then fill - Students have lunch at school. x information in the - Ask ss to fill in the table with some suitable grid table given by T. information to compare an American school with a Vietnamese school. 12’ - Work in 2 groups. - T corrects. III- Post – reading : - Write about their - Transformation writing : A6- P.45 school individually. - Ask ss to write about their school. Example: - There is usually school uniform in my school. Our classes start at....... 2’ - T corrects ss’ mistakes directly. - Retell the content c- Consolidation : 1’ of the text. - Retell the contents of the text “ School in the USA” - Copy down d- Homework : homework. - Learn by heart the new words. - Do the exercises : A2,3 – workbook - Prepare fo next lesson.. WEEK 9:. Preparing date: Period 24. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 4: at school Lesson 4: B1, 2.. 1. The objectives a. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice library vocabulary and describe the position of books in the library correctly and fluently. - Help ss read a text to understand the details and practicing library vocabulary; to describe the position of books in the library. Where can I find .... ? b. Skills Ss develop 4 skills: L, S , R & W. c. Education Love learning English 2. Preparation a.Teacher Books,tools, extraboads, visual aids, pictures, a tape , a stereo .... b. Students.

(46) Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a. Checking the old lesson(5’) *.Questions ? When do you have English/........? What time do they start? ? What subject do you like best? /What is your favourite subject? ? What time is it? *.Answers I have it on..../ They start at.......on....... I like......best/....... It is ......... Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Organization: - Greeting. 1’ - Greeting. - Who’s absent today? - The monitor answers * Warm up : 6’ Jumble words - Ss rearrange the torishy = history hipssic = physics positions of the letters. phygrageo = geography ylogibo = biology - Go to the bb to write leritarute = literature no teh elft = on the left rightly words in 2 teams b. New lesson : 8’ I- Pre- reading ( Vocabulary) + a library : th viÖn ( explanation) + a reference book :s¸ch tham kh¶o( translation) - Listen to the t. + a dictionary : quyÓn tõ ®iÓn ( realia) - Repeat in chorus 7 + a reader : độc giả, ngời đọc ( translation) then individually. + a novel : tiÓu thuyÕt ( translation) - Copy down. +a rack : giá đỡ ( picture) + (to) find : t×m thÊy ( explanation)  Check : Matching - Match words .  Pre- questions : 3’ - T gives 2 questions, asks ss to answer the qs : - Answer the qs 1) When is the library open? individually. 2) What kinds of books are there in the library? - T gets feedback. II- While – reading : Grid < with answer key > 9’ - T gives a grid. The library Opening time 7 a. m - Fill individually. Books on the Math, science books left Books on the History, geography books, right dictionary and literature in Vietnamese Books in Readers novels, reference books and English dictionaries Closing time 4.30 p.m - Ask ss to fill information in it .  Comprehension questions : B1 a->g. p.47, 48 -Work in pairs to ask & - Ask ss to work in pairs in some minutes. answer the questions - Call some pairs to practice aloud.  Keys : a. The magazines are on the racks. b. The newspapers are on the racks. c. the math and science books are on the shelves on the left. d. the history and geography books , dictionaries and literature in Vietnamese are on the shelves on the.

(47) right . e. the books in English are at the back of the library. f. The library opens at 7 a.m . g. the library closes at 4 p.m . III- Presentation dialogue : < B2 - P.48> - T sets the scene new structures :  Model sentences : - Where can I find the math books, please? - Where are the math books? - They are on the shelves/racks on the left.  Concept check : -Meaning: - T«i cã thÓ t×m s¸ch to¸n ë ®©u ? - Chóng ë trªn nh÷ng c¸i kÖ ë bªn tr¸i . - Form: Where can + S + find + N , please ? Where + be + N, please ? - Use: C¸ch hái vµ tr¶ lêi n¬i t×m s¸ch , b¸o trong th viÖn . - Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentences . IV. Practice : a. Word cues drill : - T runs through the cues. - Call ss practice with the cues given by T. Music / on the right newspapers / on the racks Example exchange : - S1 : Where are the music , please ? - S2 : They are on the racks on the right . science books reference books newspapers magazines readers biology books novels history books dictionaries V. Production: Written exercise. - Ask ss to write sentences about their school library, using the library vocabulary. Example :My school library opens at.... .The math books are on the shelves on the left..... . - T corrects indirect. c. Consolidation : - Retell the questions and answer in presentation dialogue. d. Homework : - Learn by heart new words. - Do the exercises B1 < P.14- workbook >.. WEEK 9:. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. 5’. - Translate into Vietnamese. - Give form. - Say out the using . 6’. - Listen . - Run through all the cues. - Practice in exchange. T -> the whole class Side – side Open pairs Close pairs - Play game into 2 teams. 5’. - Do individually 1’ 1’. - Retell - Do the exercises at home. Teaching date:. Period 25.. Unit 4: at school Lesson 5: B3, 4,5. 1. The aims. - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat in chorally. - Side – side - Open pairs - Close pairs. / / 2010. / / 2010.

(48) a. Knowledge : - Help ss describe the position of books in the library by using preposition of position “ at the back / front ; on the left / right ; in the middle ”. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to describe position of books correctly and practice in comparatives, superlatives well. b. Skill Ss practice listening, reading, speaking& writing skill. c. Education Ss are eduducated to speak, correctly... 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures, a tape , a stereo .... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Proceduce * Organization :- Good afternoon! (1’) - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson(4’) *Questions - Call Ss to practice dialogue like B2 in pair *Answers - 2 Ss practice aloud - Others listen and give remark - T checks and give mark Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : at the back in the middle 4’ I- Pre- listening : 1. Slap the board : on the right at the front on the left. - Share the class into 2 teams to play game. 2. Pre – teach : Vocabulary + ( to) receive : nhËn ( antonym) + ( to) contain : bao gåm , cã ( translation) + employees (n):nh©n viªn ( example) 3. Open prediction : - Ask ss to look at the picture < B3- P.48 >and guess what books are on the racks and shelves < 2,3, 4+ 5 ; 6 +7 >. II- While - listening : Grid - Ask ss to listen to the CD 3 times, & then fill the Grid. - Ask ss to compare with their prediction.  Answer key : 2.Science and math 4+5 .Newspapers & magazines 3. Geography, History 6+7. English. 3’. - play game in 2 teams. - Listen and repeat in chorus- individually - Copy down.. 2’. - Predict in 3 groups.. 8’. - listen to the tape 3 times to fill..

(49) N Guess Listen 1 Study Center 2 5’ 3 4+5 6+7 8 Library’s desk 4’ -T gets feedback &gives answer key. III- Post – listening: Write it up . - Ask ss to write sentences about the position of books in the library, using the grid. Example: there are science and math books next to the Geography books. 7’ IV- Pre- reading: True / False predictions < B4-P.49 >. - Ask ss to guess T or F. 1. The library of Congress in New York. 2. It receives copies of all English books. 3. There are over 100 million books in this library. 4. The shelves are about 300 km long. 5. 500 people work in the library. - T gets feedback : 1- F; 2- F; 3- T; 4- F; 5- T V- While- reading : 5’  LUCKY NUMBERS :( Qs a->e.B4 - P.49 ) - T guides the way to play this game. 1- d ; 2 – LN ; 3 – e ; 4 – b ; 5- LN ; 6- a ; 7 – c  Answer key: a. It’s in Washington DC, the capital of USA. b. It has over 100 million books. c. It has about 1000 km of shelves. d. Over 5.000 people work there. e. Because it receives copies of all American books. VI- Post – reading : - Ask ss to compare their school library with the library of Congress. Yr The library 1’ school of Congress library 1. smaller v 1’ 2. more modern v 3. has more books v 4. has shorter v bookshelves 5. more employees v 6. largest v - Write - it – up : Example: My school library is smaller than the Library. - write it in individually.. -Predict T or F in individually.. - give their predictions -play game in 2 teams. - say out and put tick in the grid.. - Do individually. - Retell the main points of this lesson. - Copy down homework - Write it at home..

(50) of Congress. c-Consolidation : - Retell some prepositions of position: “at the back / front; on the right / left ; in the middle” ; the content of reading “ The library of Congress ”. d- Homework : - Write some more sentences from the table in Post – reading. - Learn by heart new words.. Week 9. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 26.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 5: Work and play Lesson 1: a1. 1.The aims a. Knowledge - Help ss understand and remember school subjects & learn how to talk about recess activities. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the text and practice fluently. Revision of simple present to talk about school subjects with some languages as :To learn about/ be interested in/ experiment /to use/ map b. Skill Ss practice reading, listening, speaking & writing skill c. Education Ss are eduducated to read and speak English correctly... 2. Preparation a.Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures , a tape , a stereo.... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Proceduce * Organization: Greeting: - Who’s absent today ? a.Checking the old lesson (5’) * Questions - How often do you go to the library? - When do you go to the library? - What books do you like reading? - Where can you find the English books/math/literature/.......? *Answers - Ps’answer - I sometime go to… - At the weekend - I like English book ….

(51) Teacher’s activities b. New lesson : 1- Presentation :  Pre- teach : - T elicits some new words : + ( to) learn about : häc vÒ ( translation) + ( to) use : dïng , sö dông ( explanation) + How to use : c¸ch dïng nh thÕ nµo ( translation) + ( to) be interested in : yªu thÝch ( example) + ( to) do an experiment : lµm thÝ nghiÖm(explanation) + last (adj / adv ) : cuèi cïng ( example) + Computer science : m«n tin häc ( example) + a map : bản đồ ( realia)  Check : Matching  A1 < P.51 > a) The text : 1. Which school does Mai go to ? 2. What does Mai study at school? 3. What time do her classes start and finish? b) Model sentences : - T elicits the model sentence : T : What does Mai study in her Computer science class? +Form : What +do/does + S+ study/learn+ in (her) + m«n häc ? S +Vs /es + how to / about...... - Ss : She learns how to use a computer. - Ask ss to practice : T -> the whole class ; side -> side ; open -> close pairs + Read the text again & fill in the grid : Classes What to do Computer science learn how to use a computer Geography study maps & learn about different countries Physics do some experiments 2. Practice : Word cues drill : - T runs through all the cues :  Mai / Physics class / do some experiments  They / Geography class / learn about maps.  You / music class / learn how to sing song.  He / English class / learn how to speak English. 3. Production : - T gives some pictures with word phrases. - Ask ss to use form asking and answering. + Picture 1: physics class / do some experiments. + Picture 2: Science class / learn how to use a computer. + Picture 3: Geography class / learn about maps and different countries. c. Consolidation: - Ask ss to retell how to say what smb to do in their class. d. Homework:. T. Ss’ activities. 8’ - Listen and repeat chorus individually - copy down. 4’. - match words. 5’. - Predict the answer individually.. 5’. - Listen and repeat. - practice in exchange. - read the text and fill in the grid in groups of 5.. 10’ - Run through the cues. - Practice in exchange. 5’ - Look at the pictures – practice in pairs.. 2’ 1’. - Retell the main points of the lesson..

(52) - Do ex1 p.27-workbook - Writing :- Write about your study at school : eg : I study at Duong Duc school. In my Physics class i learn about............ Week 10.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. - Copy down homework. Teaching date:. Period 27.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 5: Work and play Lesson 2: a2,3. (p.52-53) 1. The aims a. Knowledge. - Help ss read the text about Ba then practice the questions given. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text, practice asking and answering the qs about Ba fluently. - Know more about new words : enjoy, fix, electronics, repair, an art club, be good at, How much does .....cost? b. Skill Reading for details about Ba’s activities at school and at home c. Education Ss are eduducated to read and speak English correctly... 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures .... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure.

(53) * Organization: - Good afternoon ! - Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson( 5’) *Questions ? Talk some sentences about you & your subjects at school ? ? What subjects do you study today? What do you study in .......class? ? What subject do you like best?( What is your favorite subject?) * Answers - I’m a student at LQD school, I’m .....years old. I’m in grade/class......I go to school 6 days a week. Today I stuty ......My favorite subject is...... - T corrects and gives them marks. T’s activities b. New lesson : A. Pre reading : * Pre teach : T elicits some new words:  (to) repair : Söa ch÷a (m¸y mãc) ( picture )  (to) fix : lắp , lắp đặt ( picture )  (to) enjoy : yªu thÝch = like(v) ( synonym )  (to) be good at :giái vÒ ..... g× ( translation )  electronics (n) : ®iÖn tö ( translation )  art club (n) : c©u l¹c bé ( explanation )  an art club (n) câu lạc bộ nghệ thuật  artist ( n) hoạ sĩ  drawing(n) bức vẽ  household appliances: Các thiết bị gđ * Check : Matching * T / F statement predictions : - Ask ss to guess true or false. 1. Ba enjoy his school very much . 2. His favorite subject is electronics. 3. In this class. He does some experiments. 4. He isn’t good at fixing things. 5. He can help his parents at home. 6. He never goes to art club. - T gets feedback. B. While - reading : a, Ask ss to give their predictions: * Answer key : 1-T ; 2-T ; 5-T 3-F : He learn to repair household appliances. 4-F : He is good at fixing things. 6-F : He goes to art club after school. b, Comprehension questions : LUCKY NUMBERS. - Ask ss to play a game in 2 teams. 1.a 2.LN 3.c 4.b 5.d 6.e C. Post reading : - Ask ss to practice with qs : f,g,h p.53 in pairs.. T. Ss’ activities. 8’. - Listen and repeat in chorus and individually - copy down. - Match words. 4’ - Predict T / F in individually. 15’ - Give their predictions - copy down - Play a game in 2 teams. Ss work in pair to ask.

(54) - T corrects. 3*. Read. Then answer . To cost ( v) trị giá To erase (v ) xóa ex: How much does one banana cost? Answer : One banana costs 600d. 10’ and answer Have Ss present at class Ss listen then do the exercise Ss present their answer Call Ss practice dialogue. c. Consolidation : - Retell some information about Ba. d. Homework : - Do the exercise A1 ( workbook ) - Read A5 (*) and odd one out. - Learn by heart all the new words.. Week 10.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. 2’. - Retell the main points of the lesson.. 1’. -. Teaching date:. Period 28.. Copy down homework. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 5: Work and play Lesson 3: a4- 6. (p.54 - 55) 1, The objectives a. Knowledge - Help ss listen and match the subjects with some pictures. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen and read the names of subjects well then practice them fluently. - Learn some more new words : an essay, an event, a calculator,......... b. Skills - School subjects vocabulary with listening and reading practice c. Education - Ss are eduducated to read and speak English correctly... 2. Prepare a. Teacher - Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students - Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: - Good afternoon! -Who’s absent today? a. Checking up (4’) - Ask ss to read the text and answer the questions : a) Does Ba enjoy his school? b) Is he good at electronics? c) Does he play the guitar? - T corrects and gives them marks. - Answer the questions individually. Teacher’s activities b. New lesson :. Tim e. Ss’ activities.

(55) I- Listening :  Pre- listening: Prediction. - Ask ss to predict what subjects Ba / Hoa has on Saturday morning. - Ask ss to write the names ( Ba and Hoa ) next to the picture .  While – listening : - Let ss listen and check their prediction. - Ask ss to get feedback and give answers : * Keys: Ba : d , a, e ; Hoa : c, b, e . II- Reading :  Pre- reading : * Pre-teach : - T elicits some new words : + an essay : bµi luËn / bµi v¨n (translation) + calculator : m¸y tÝnh ( realia) + an event : sù kiÖn ( translation) + past and present events : * Matching: A6- P.55.  Open prediction : - Ask ss to predict the subjects that will appear in the text.  While- reading : A5- P.55 - Let ss read the text and check their predictions. - Comprehension questions : a) What do you study at school? b) What do you learn in literature? c) Do you study past and present events in history? d) What subjects do you learn about different countries and their people? e) Do you speak English in language class? f) What other things do you study?  Post – reading: Nought and crosses. - Ask ss to play game in 2 teams. History language Art Physics Computer science Math Literature Electronics Geography - Find out the winner. c. Consolidation T repeats main contents: subjects at school & related words of each subject P: Listen and remember ? Read part of remember? P: Read & remember these main languages d. Home work. 3’. - Predict individually and write.. 7’ - Listen carefully and check.. 5’. - Match in groups 5’ -Predict individually. 10’. - Read in groups. - Answer the questions in pairs.. 7’. - Play the game in 2 teams.. 2’ -Retell the main point of the lesson..

(56) - Learn the new words by heart. - Do exercise 3,4 (P.28) in the workbook. Practice reading B5,7 (textbook) - Prepare new lesson Unit 5( B1,2). Week 10.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. 2’ - Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. Period 29.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 5: Work and play Lesson 4: B1, 2. 1, The objectives a. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read the text about recess activities and know more about some activities at recess, and then they can describe recess activities well. Understant in detail and talk about recess activities using simple present tense & present progressive tense. - Learn some more new words & how to read them. b. Skills - Improve listening and reading skill c. Education - Ss are eduducated to read and speak English correctly... 2. Prepare a. Teacher -Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students - Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: - Greeting ; Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson ( 5’) * Question T calls 2 ps go on boad & ask answer about their study * Answers A : What are you good at ?/What subject do you like best? B : I am good at .../I like......best A : What is your favorite subjects?/what do you learn in your math/ English/..... class? B : It is ..... Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : I- Pre- listening (reading) 5’ - T elicits some new words by using some -Listen & repeat in chorus – pictures & other techniques. individually. + ( to) chat : t¸n gÉu ( picture) - Guess the meaning + ( to)play catch : ch¬i ®uæi b¾t ( picture) - Copy down + ( to)play marbles : ch¬i b¾n bi ( picture) + ( to)skip rope : ch¬i nh¶y d©y ( mime) + noisy (adj ): ån µo >< quite ( synonym) + ( to)play blind man’s bluff :ch¬i bÞt m¾t b¾t.

(57) dª ( picture) * Check : R & R + Networks : chatting. Activities at recess. eating play. 3’. Activities at recess. games - Rewrite words. - Do individually.. -Ask ss to net some words to talk about some activities at recess. II- While- reading : - T reads the text and gives the answers < Networks > a) Questions: Ask ss to ask and answer the questions after guessing the answers. - Play a game : Lucky number 1 2 3* 4 5 6 7 8 9* 1- a. What time do ss have a recess? - They have recess at 9.25. 5- b. Do they eaten drink at recess? – Yes, they do. 2- d. What are the boys playing? - They’re playing marbles. 8- e. What are the girls playing? - They are skipping rope. 4- f. What is the most popular activity – It’s talking. 7- c. Do they play soccer at recess? – No, they don’t. 3 , 9 - > Lucky Number b) B2- P.57: Listen and match each name to an activity. III- Post- reading : -Ask ss to listen 3 times, and then match. Mai Kien Lan Ba. a. playing catch b. playing marbles c. skipping rope d. playing blind man’s bluff. c. Consolidation :. 17’. - Guess the answers.. - Play game in 2 teams. 10’ - Listen to the tape. - Matching.

(58) - Ask ss to retell some activities at recess with the present progressive tense.. 2’. d. Homework :. - Retell in individually. - Ask ss to learn by heart all the new words. - Writing : < the answers – Part b . P. 57 – B1>. 1’. - What do you and your friends often do at. -. Copy down homework. recess? Begin: At my recess I often ...... and Hoa ....... - Prepare the next lesson: B3,4. Week 11.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 30.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 5: Work and play Lesson 5: b3,4. 1, The objectives a. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read the text about recess activities continue to understant in detail and talk about recess activities in the USA and practice fluently. - Talk about their own recess activities using structure & vocabulary in the lesson. b. Skills - Improve reading and speaking skill c. Education - Ss are eduducated to read and speak English correctly... 3. Prepare a. Teacher - Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: - Good afternoon! Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson ( 5’) * Question T calls 2 ps go on boad & ask answer about activities in the pictrures in B1 * Answers P1: What are the boys/ girls /they doing? P2: They are + V-ing........ Teacher’s activities. T. Ss’ activities.

(59) b. New lesson : I. Revision: Bingo. 6’ - Let ss write 5 activities at their recess. - Write 5 sentences (activities) at - T reads: play catch / play soccer / play recess. volleyball / play marbles / play blind man’s bluff / play basketball / skip rope / read / talk - Listen & tick, say “ Bingo” to friend/ drink and eat/ listen to music / meet friends. II. Presentation :  Pre- teach < Vocabulary > 5’ - Listen & repeat in chorus- T elicits some new words. individually + Junior high school : trêng THCS - Copy down. (example) - Rewrite words. + Senior high school : trêng THPT (example) + ( to)score a goal : ghi bµn (translation) + ( to) swap : trao đổi ( translation) +( to) relax : gi¶i lao ( example) + ( to) take part in : tham gia / tham dù (translation) * Check : Rub out and Remember  Pre- reading: Prediction. - Ask ss to predict the answers : 2’ - Predict individually Qs: What do ss in American schools do at Ex: play volleyball, recess? eating........... . * Gets feedback : - Read & check  While – reading : Multiple choice - Let ss read the text and check their 15’ predictions. - Read and do. * Multiple choice : - Listen and check - Let ss read and do. - T gets feedback and gives answers : * Answer keys : a- C ; b - A ; c- B ; d- D  Post –reading: Discussion. -Talk about what you often do at recess. 8’ - Free talk. * Answer the questions: - What is the most popular recess activity in your school? - Discuss in 4 groups. III. Survey : - Say out their opinions. - Ask ss to ask three people and put the tick in each column. - Go around the class and ask Activities their friends. Name. Lan. soccer. catch. Skip rope. . . c. Consolidation :. Marbles. read. . talk. Drink/ eat.

(60) - Retell the names of some activities at recess. d. Homework : - Ask ss to learn by heart vocabulary. - Do the exercises < B1-3 – Workbook >. Week 11.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. 2’ 1’. - Retell the main points of this lesson. - Learn vocabulary. - Do the exercises at home. - Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. Period 31.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 6: After school Lesson 1: a1 1. The objectives a. Knowledge - Help Ss listening and understand about the text. They can practice with their partner. Learn how to talk about popular after school activities. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer with “How often... ?” by using adverbs of frequency “ always , usually , often, sometimes ... never ” fluently. b. Skills - Improve listening, reading ,writing and speaking skill c. Education - Ss are eduducated to read and speak English correctly... 2. Prepare a. Teacher - Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students - Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Proceduce * Organization : - Good afternoon! - Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson ( 5’) * Questions ? Where is Tim’school?/ Which school does he go to? ? What do American students often do at recess? * Answers - It’s in Califorlia/.......... - They often ...... Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : I/ Pre-teach : *Vocabulary: - should: (v) nªn. 6’ - work in 3 groups of 4 (trans).

(61) - Cold drink(n): §å uèng l¹nh (explain) - Good idea! ý kiÕn hay( explain) -Practices everyday: luyÖn tËp hµng ngµy(explain) - Together(n): cïng nhau (trans) - Volleyball(n): bãng chuyÒn (explain) - Team(n): đội(example). -. Copy down new words.. -. Work individually. -. Repeat in chorus. - Come along…đến với - May be: cã lÏ. * Check: matching. * Pre-listening: - T. hang a picture on the board(pic in the ELbook) - Ask Ss look at the pic and guess about contents of. 6’. the text.. - Look at the picture. II/ While –listening: -. T. read the text – Ss listening. -. Asks Ss read again and check their. Ss listening 15’. prediction.. - Look at the picture and.  Comprehension questions: -. guess the main contents of. Play a game: “ lucky number”. the text..  1d / 2LN / 3e / 4b / 5LN / 6a / 7f / 8c.. - Write individually..  Answer keys:. Ss & T correct together. a) She is doing her math homework. b) They are going to the cafe .. c) He is in the music room. d) He is learning to play the guitar. e) Minh usually meet his friends f) She enjoys playing volleyball. III/ Post- listening: -. Do Ex A1(33) in workbook.. -. T. corrects their mistakes.. c. Consolidation : - Retell the content of the lesson: the activities after school.. 10’. 2’. Answer the questions.. -. Work in two teams.

(62) d. Homework : - Ask ss to write Ba’s activity after school.. 1’. - Retell individually. - Do all ex - Learn by heart vocabulary - Copy down homework. - Write about Ba at home - Do all ex Learn by heart voca Copy down. -. homework. Week 12. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 32.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 6: After school Lesson 2: a2 1. The aims a. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer with “How often...?” by using adverbs of frequency “always, usually, often, sometimes ... never” fluently . - Help ss learn how to talk about popular after school activities. b. Skill - Further practice speaking in adverds of frequently with the simple presents tense for after- school activities c.Education - Ss are eduducated to helpful activities afterschool... 2. Preparation a. Teacher - Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students - Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedures * Organization: - Good afternoon! Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson( Test 15’) *. Question: Fill in the blanks with the right form of the verbs & then answer the questions Jim Green is an English boy. He( 1. study)...........at May school. His farther is an.

(63) engineer. He(2. work) ........for Toyota Company. His mother (3. be)........... a teacher She(4.teach) ........ English in a small school near their home. In her school, there(5.be) about two hundred students. Many of them (6. be )........from Viet Nam . The Vietnamese students(7. work) ................hard at English. Jim’s mother is pleased with the Vietnamese students. Jim (8. say)......that he(9..want).........to be an English teacher , too. He would like (10 teach)............................Vietnamese or Chinese students because he want to learn Vietnamese or Chinese from them. a, What does Jim’s father do? d, Where does she work? b, What Company does his father work for? e, What does Jim want to be? why? c, What does Jim’s mother do? *. Answers 1. studies 2. works 3.is 4.teaches 5. are 6. are 7. work 8. says 9.wants 10. to teach ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,5 đ) a, His farther is an engineer. c. His mother is a teacher . d. She works at a school near her house d. He works......for Toyota Company. e. He wants to be an English teacher because because he want to learn Vietnamese or Chinese from them. ( Mỗi câu trả lời đúng đạt 1 điểm) Teacher’s activities b. New lesson : I- Revision: Slap the board. - T reads the Vietnamese words, ss slap the English ones. ( Bơi , xem T.V , chơi trò chơi điện tử , chơi bóng đá , đi xem phim , đọc sách ) *Labeling: A2 – P.61. - Ask ss to look at the activities and label the pictures in 3 groups.  Keys : 1. Reading / studying in the library 2. swimming 3. play video games 4. going to the movies 5. playing soccer 6. watching T.V II- Practice : Noughts and Crosses - Ask ss to play a game in 2 teams by using words or phrases given.. T. Ss’ activities. 6’. - Play game in 2 teams. 6’ - Work in 3 groups of 10 - Ss to look at the activities and label the pictures in 3 groups.. 10’. Copy answer keys. - play game in 2 team.

(64) always/go swimming usually/play soccer usually/ watch T.V. often/ go to the zoo sometimes/ play computer games often/ play tennis. never/ go to the library often / go/ movie sometimes/ do the housework. Example: S1: What do you usually do after school? S2: I usually watch T.V. III- Further practice : Write it up - Ask ss to write the answers : Qs: How often do you study in the library after school? Eg: I always study in the library school after school. .............................................................................. T corrects mistakes and gives them marks. c. Consolidation : - Retell the content of the lesson: the activities after school. - Questions with what, how often & Activities after school such as: + playing computer games + Going to the movie- playing soccer + watching TV/.......... d. Homework : - Ask ss to write Ba’s activity after school. - Learn by heart vocabulary and main structure. 5’ - Write individually. Ss & T correct together. 2’. 1’. - Retell the main point of this lesson. Work individually - Write about Ba at home. grammar. Do exercise 3 in workbooks - Prepare for next lesson-A3,4.. Week 12. Preparing date: Period 33.. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 6: After school Lesson 3: a3, 4(p. 62).

(65) 1.The objectives a. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to : Help ss understand a text for details about pastime activities and understand the content of the text well, they can ask and answer the questions given exactly. b. Skill - Ps train reading, listening ,speaking & writing skill c. Education - Ss are eduducated to helpful activities afterschool, and making formal conversation... 2. Preparation a. Teacher - Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo, paperboard of A4.... b. Students - Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedures * Organization: - Good morning! Who’s absent today a. Checking the old lesson( 5’) T: Trả bài kiểm tra 15 phút, chữa bài và gọi tên ghi điểm Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : I- Pre- reading : 9’  Pre- teach: T elicits some new words. - Listen to T + sporty ( adj) : thuéc thÓ thao ( translation) - Guess the meaning + comic ( n) : truyÖn tranh (example) - Repeat in chorus+ president(n): ngời đứng đầu, thủ lĩnh individually (translation) - Copy down + ( to)collect : su tËp ( translation) + a collection : bé su tËp ( translation) + ( to) rehearse : diÔn tËp ( translation) * Check : What and where 6’  True / False prediction : - Predict T or F individually - Ask ss to predict T or F 1. Nga , Ba , Nam are students in class 7A. 2. They like sports very much. 3. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging. 4. Ba likes collecting stamps. 5. Nam plays soccer every afternoon. - Read the text individually 6. Nam usually watches T.V. - T gets feedback. 6’ - Guess their predictions II. While- reading: A3- P.62. - Ask ss to read the text and check their guess. - T gets feedback and gives key : 1 -T ; 2 - F ; 3- F; 4- T ; 5 - F ; 6- T 7’  Comprehension questions : LUCKY - Play game in 2 teams to NUMBERS choose the number; then - Ask ss to play a game in 2 teams answer the qs 1 – a ; 2 – b; 3 – c ; 4 – LN ; 5- d ; 6- LN * Keys : -Find out the team is a- Her group is rehearsing a play for the school winner anniversary celebration. b - He gets American stamps from Liz, his American friend. c - The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday afternoon. d- Nam never plays games. 8’ III- Post - reading : A4- P.63.

(66) * Matching : - Ask ss to listen and match each name to an activity: Mai – go to the school cafeteria Nam – rehearse a play Ba – go to the circus Lan – watch movie Kien – tidy the classroom - T corrects c. Consolidation : - Retell the contents of the lesson: talk about the activities of somebody in pastime. d. Homework : - Ask ss to do exercise 4 - < workbook > - Learn by heart vocabulary. - Write a short paragraph about after school activities using the matching < A4- P.63 > - Prepare new lesson Unit 6: After school B1.. Week 13.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. - Listen and match in 2 groups. - Say out their listening - Ss to listen and match each name to an activity.. 2’ 2’. - Retell the contents of the lesson - Copy down homework. - Do the exercise at home individually. Teaching date:. Period 34.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 6: After school Lesson 4: b1 (p. 64) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge -By the end of the lessons, Help ss make suggestions with “Let’s / What about ...?/ Why don’t you ....?”. Ss will be able to understand the structures and practice them correctly.. + what about+V-ing? +let’s +V +why don’t you+ V? b. Skill Reading a text for details c. Education Ss are eduducated to helpful activities afterschool... 2. Preparation a. Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure. * Organization: - Good morning! Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson ( 5’) *.Questions a, What is Hoa’s theater group doing?.

(67) b, What does Ba & his friends often do on wednesday afternoon? c, What does Nam often do after school? d, What do you often do after school? e, How often do you go fishing? *. Answers a. Hoa’s theater group is rehearsing a play b.They meet ...... c. He often watches videos d, I often .......... Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : 5’ I- Presentation : - Listen to T. Pre- teach: T elicits some new words. - Repeat in chorus- individually + an assignment : ( explanation) - Copy down + fun (adj) : ( revision) + ( to)relax : ( revision) - Listen & repeat in chorus * Check : Ro & Rm Presentation text < B1- P. 64 > 10’ individually - T models sentences : Suggestions Responses - Let’s go to my - Yes, let’s. house. - Good idea. - What about going to the movies? - Sorry, I can’t. - Why don’t you relax? Concept check : - Give meaning & form - Meaning: translate into Vietnamese. - Form : 1. Let’s + v < Let‘s = Let us > 2. What about + V-ing ? 3. Why don’t + you + V? - Copy down. - Use: Đa ra một lời đề nghị , rủ rê . - Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentences. II- Practice: Word cues drill. 14’ - Run through all the cues. - Ask ss to run through all the cues. - Let ss practice. 1. Let’s / listen / music. v 2. What / go / cafeteria. x - Practice in exchange. 3. Why / join / us. v T ->the whole class. 4. What / watch / movie. x side -> side Example exchange : open-> close pairs S1: Let’s listen to music. S2: Yes, let’s. III- Comprehension questions: further practice 8’ < a-> e P.61>. - Ask ss to work in pairs: asking & answering - Work in pairs the questions. - T gets feedback : Asking & answering the * Keys : questions. a- Nam wants to go to the movies. Copy down answer keys. b – Because there aren’t any good movies at the moment. c – She wants to listen to some music. d- Because she has many assignments. e- It’s Saturday . 2’ c. Consolidation :.

(68) - Retell the way to make suggestions with “Let’s / What about ....?/ Why don’t you ....?” d. Homework : - Ask ss to learn by heart new words. - Ask ss to do exercises in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson Unit 6: After school B2.. Week 13.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. 1’. - Retell the main points of the lesson. - Do the exercises at home - Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. Period 35.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 6: After school Lesson 5: b2 ( page 65) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge By the end of the lesson, Help ss read a magazine survey about the most popular activities of American teenagers and getting further practice in leisure vocabulary. Ss will be able to understand the contents of the reading exactly and talk about what they like doing in their freetime. + Ss learn some new languages. a teenager a scout a musical instrument a guide a model (to) attend + The simple present tense. b. Skill Ps practice reading, speaking & writing skill. c. Education Ss are eduducated to helpful activities after school... 2. Preparation a.Teacher Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures , b.Students Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure T’s activities T Ss’activities * Organization: - Goodmorning! 1’ - Ss answer - Who’s absent today? 5’ a. Checking up : - S1 asks – S2 answers. - Call ss make a suggestion : * Let’s / come back / Hoa’s house * What/ rehearse / a play. - T corrects and gives them marks. b. New lesson : 7’ I. Pre - reading : -Listen and repeat in chorus , * Vocabulary: - T elicits some new words. individually - teenager ( n ) thiÕu niªn tõ 13- 19 tuæi - Copy down. (example) - musical instrument ( n ) nh¹c cô.

(69) (translation ) - scout ( boy scout ) hớng đạo sinh (translation ) - guide ( girl guide ) híng dÉn viªn (explanation ) - ( to ) attend : tham gia, tham dù (translation ) * Check : What and where * Open prediction : - Ss predict what American teenagers like to do in their free time. II. While - reading : - Let ss read B2-p.65 and check their prediction. * Comprehension questions : - Asks ss to answer the questions in pairs. 1. Which of these activities in the list of American teenagers do you think are also popular among Vietnamese teenagers? 2. Are there many kinds of entertainment for teenagers in Viet Nam? What are they? 3. What organizations are there for teenagers in Vietnam? - Get feedback. *Answer key : 1. Watch TV , listen to music , go to the movies help old people. 2. Ss’ answer. 3. Young Pioneers or different kinds of clubs for children. III. Post - reading : Discussion : - Asks ss to ask their friends what they like doing in their free time and make a list of their group’s favorite leisure activities in groups of four. c. Consolidation : - Retell the content of the lesson: talk about what American teenagers like to do in their free time. d. Homework : - Do the exercise B1,2 in workbook . - Learn by heart the new words. - Prepare for next lesson.. Week 14.. Preparing date:. /. / 2010. -Rewrite words. - Predict individually. - Read B2-p65 in group. - Check their prediction. - Work in pairs. 3’ 18’. - Look at the pictures and give the short answer.. 8’. - Discuss in groups of four.. 2’. - Retell the main points of this lesson. 1’. - Do the exercise B1,2 at home. - Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. Period 36.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 6: After school Lesson 6: b3, 4. ( page 66) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge.

(70) - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the structures and practice them correctly. - Help Ss listen to and understand detail about dialogue. They can read, listen and practice with their partner, make similar dialogue. + Make invitation & accept or refuse invitation. + Read the text to understand the details & answer the questions. b, Skills: -Training listening, speaking, reading . c. Education: - Ss are eduducated to helpful activities after school... 2. Preparation a. Teacher: -Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: - Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: - Good morning! - Who are absent today? a. Checking the old lesson (5’) *Question Have 2 Ss practice asking and answering about what they like doing in their free time *Answers P1: What do Amarican teenagers like doing in their free time? What do you like doing in their free time? P2: Answer -They like going shopping/............... - I like playing soccer/............. T checks and give mark. Teacher’s activities T b. New lesson : */ Revision: : “Hangman” 5’ + Restaurant: _._._._._._._._._._. + Teenager: _._._._._._._._. * Cues: 1) Nơi để đến ăn uống. 2) Là những người trẻ tuổi, lứa tuổi từ 15-25. -T gives answer keys. I/ Presentation: 13’ 1.Pre-teach: - I’d love to = I would love to: tôi thích làm - After lunch: Sau bữa ăn trưa. - Pleasure: Niềm vui thích, điều thú vị. - Wedding (n): Đám cưới. - Thank anyway: Dù sao cũng cảm ơn bạn. - You’re welcome: có gì đâu. - I’m not sure: Mình không chắc lắm. - That’s too bad: tiếc quá.. Ss’ activities -Play a game: “HANG MAN” - Listen & repeat in chorus individually. - Listen to T. - Repeat in chorus- individually - Copy down.

(71) - Community service: Sự phục vụ cộng đồng. * Check: Matching. 2. Presentation dialogue: - Asks Ss listen to the radio (3times). - Asks Ss work with their partners. - T gives model sentences * Model sentences: * Making invitaion - Would you like to + V...? Ex: Would you like to drink orange juice? + Accept invitation Yes, I’d love to. That’s good idea. That would be great fun. + Refuse invitation I’m sorry. I can’t. + Respond for thank you( đỏp lại) You’re welcome. It’s my pleasure.. To go to the board to matching Ss listen to the radio (3times). Ss work with their partners. - Give meaning & form -. - Copy down.. - Practice in exchange. T ->the whole class. side -> side open-> close pairs. II/ Practice: 11’ Ask some Ss read dialogue again. Work in groups of 4. Then discuss. Ss read dialogue again T. corrects their mistakes and Work in groups of 4. Then explains for Ss understand. discuss. T gives questions: 1/ How do some teenagers help the community? 2/ How do Vietnamese teenagers help the community? -Asks Ss discuss. -T corrects their mistakes. a, They do their shopping, they do their housework, clean yard....... b, They help elder people. They clearn their house......... 8’ III/ Post-listening:  Open dialogue: Asks Ss make a dialogue the similar this dialogue. A: Would you like to come to my home for dinner? B: I’m not sure. I’ll call you later. A: Ok. B: Thanks for inviting me.. Ss make a dialogue the similar this dialogue. Work in pairs. -.

(72) A: It’s my pleasure. … c. Consolidation P: Making invitaion - Would you like to + V...? + Accept invitation Yes, I’d love to. + Refuse invitation I’m sorry. I can’t. + Respond for thank you( đỏp lại) You’re welcome. d. Home work - Learn the new words by heart & structure & make examples using the invitation - Practice reading the text B3,4,5 again. - Do exercise B3,4,5 in the workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson.. 2’ - Retell the main points of the lesson.. 1’ - Do the exercises at home - Copy down homework.. Week 14. Preparing date: Period 37.. /. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 6: After school Language focus 2 1. The objectives a. Knowledge - Help Ss consolidate the knowledge that they’ve leant from unit 4 to unit 6: * Present continuous tense. / * This, that, these, those * Time and subjects. / * Adverb of frequency. - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to remember the structures and do exercises correctly. b. Skills: Improve listening, speaking, reading & writing skills . c. Education: Ss are educated to helpful activities after school... 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures , b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Proceduce * Organization : - Good morning ! - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson ( 3’) * Questions ? Do you usually do the volunteer work?/ what are they? ? Do you know what kind of volunteer work do Amarican volunteers often do to hepl community? * Answers - They do their shopping, they do their housework, clean yard....... - They help elder people. They clearn their house..........

(73) T’s activities b. New lesson : 5’ I. Present Progressive tense : * Form: * S + be + V-ing. * S + be-not + V-ing. * Be + s + V-ing? * Use: Dùng để diễn tả hành động đang xảy ra ngay t¹i thêi ®iÓm nãi . - Thêng ®i víi: now, at the moment , at this time, at present,.. * Eg : Lan / watch TV / at the moment --> Lan is watching TV at the moment. - Ask ss to do exercise 1 p.68. - Gets feedback :is doing / is writing / is reading / is cooking/ Are playing / is kicking / is running. 10’ II. This and that / These and those : - This :đây ( chỉ đồ vật / ngời ở gần ) - That :kia ( chỉ đồ vật / ngời ở xa ) This / that + n + is..... - These : chỉ nhiều ngời / đồ vật ở xa - Those : chỉ những ngời / những đồ vật ở xa These/ those + Ns + are....... - Ask ss to complete the dialogue in pairs.(ex 2p.68 ) * Answer key : b. Mom: .... that..... c. .....these....... Son: That..... this....... – These .....? Those ...... d. Mom :..... these....... Son : ......those...... III. Adverbs of frequency : 10’ - always / usually / often / sometimes / seldom / never. - Ask ss to do ex 5 p. 71 : write about Ba eg : Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunchtime . IV. Time : C¸ch hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ giê : What time is it ? - It + phót + to + giê.( giê kÐm ) - It + giê + phót . ( giê h¬n ) - It + giờ + o’clock. ( giờ đúng ) - Ask ss to write the correct time and then practice *Ex 3 p. 69 : * Key ; b. seven fifteen. / c. ten thirty. d. six forty five / fifteen to seven . E. Vocabulary : Name of subjects : - Ask ss to write the correct subject names :. Ss’ activities - Retell form & use. - Do exercise 1 p.68 the same Example. - Retell and take notes.. - Work in pairs.. - Retell the meanings. - Write about Ba in individually.. 5’ - Retell the way to ask and answer about the time .. - Write individually, then work in pairs.. -. Ss do individually.

(74) Chemistry. English. History. Math. 8’ Geography G. Making suggestions : - Let’s + V.... - Would you like + to-V..... ? - Should we + V ....... ? - Responses: - Ok . / I’d love to . - I’m sorry, I can’t . - Ask ss to write down possible dialogues. Eg: Lan : Let’s go swimming. Hoa : Ok . 2’ Minh: Should we play table tennis? Nam: I’m sorry, I can’t. Ba: Would you like to play basketball? Nga: I’d love to . c. Consolidation ? Repeat the main knowledge ? P: Answer 1’ - The present progressive tense - This/ that/ these/ those - The adverbs of frequency - Suggestions T: Feetback to ps listen & remember d. Homework : - Learn structure by heart & make examples - Practice doing all the exercise again. - Do the exercise 6 p.7 - Do all exercise test yourself in the workbook.. Week 14. Preparing date: /. / 2010. - Retell form -. Making suggestions. -. Practice in pairs. -. Ss to write down possible dialogues.. -. Retell the main points of this lesson.. -. Copy down homework.. Teaching date:. Period 38.. WRITTEN TEST 2 ( 45’) 1.The objectives. / / 2010. / / 2010.

(75) a.Knowledge Through the test, check Ss’ progress and Ss’ understanding, evaluate Ss’ level, help Ss focus on learning tasks. T check how Ss studied in unit 4, 5, 6 and T will have suitable methods in the future. b.Skill Ss are check writing, reading , speaking and listening skills.... c.Education Ss do the test themselves 2.Preparation a.Teacher: Copies of test, teaching plan. b.Students: Learn the lessons, studying tools , … 3.Procedure CHỦ ĐỀ. NHẬN BIẾT TNKQ TL. Language focus - Simple future tense - Simple present tense - Prepositions - Vocab. 8. Speak. 5. THÔNG HIỂU TNKQ TL 4. VẬN DỤNG TNKQ TL. TỔNG 12. 2. 2. 4. 5 1. Read. 1 6. 3 1.5. 9 1.5. 3. Write. 4. 4 2. Tổng. 13. 6. 7. 3. 1.5. 4 3.5. 2 30. 2. 10. a. Content of the test (44’) I. Choose the most suitable word or group word to underline (2ms) 1. What about (to go/going/goes/go) to the zoo on Sunday? 2. Ba and Hoa usually (watch/are watching/watches/ to watch) videos. 3. They are interested in (speaking/ speak/ speaks/ to speak) Chinese. 4. Science books are on the shelves (at/ in/ on/ to) the left of the room. 5. My uncle enjoys (dances/ is dancing/ dance/ dancing). 6. Students have two (20-minutes break/ 20-minute breaks/ 20- minute break/ 20minutes breaks) each day. 7. He (rehearses/ is rehearsing/ rehears/ to rehears) a play for school anniversary celebration at present. 8. In (Math/ History/ Music/ Chemistry), we do some experiments.. II.. 1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. 6.. 7.. 8.. Match each subject to the correct items. (1ms) 1. Physical Education. a. piano, guitar, violin, songs book. 2. Geography. b. graphs, equation, calculator. 3. Music. c. games, running shoes, ball.

(76) 4. Art. d. map, globe, atlas. 5. Math. e. paper, pencils, paint. 1+……; 2+…... ; 3+ …… ; 4+…… ; 5+…… III.. Put the verbs in the brackets in the correct form or tense(2ms). 1. His brothers (come) home tomorrow evening. …………………………………………………… 2. Where (be) your friends?- They (play) violins in the music room. …………………………………………………… 3. He always (study) English at home. …………………………………………………… 4. Lan (be) at home tonight? …………………………………………………… IV.. Fill in each blank with the suitable word, then answer the questions(3ms) About. president. give. friends. bring. American. Ba is a (1)……………….. of the stamp collector’s club. On Wednesday afternoons, he and his (2)……………….. get together and talk (3)……………. their stamps. If they have any news stamps, they usually (4)……………… them to school. Ba’s (5)………………… friend, Liz, (6) ………………. Him a lot of American stamps. Questions: 1. When does the stamps collector’s club meet? …………………………………………………… 2. What do they usually do if they have any new stamps? …………………………………………………… 3. How does Ba get American stamps? …………………………………………………… V.. Writing: Write a passage , using the following cues(2ms) 1. Nam/ not/ sporty/ very/./ …………………………………………………… 2. In/ afternoon/ he/ usually/ come/ home/ and/ watch/ video/./ …………………………………………………… 3. Most/ time/ he/ lie/ couch/ front/ TV/./ …………………………………………………… 4. Would/ you/ like/ watch/ film/?/.

(77) ………………………………………………… ĐÁP ÁN CHẤM: I. 1. going 5. dancing. 2. watch. 3. speaking. 4. on. 6. 20-minute 7. is rehearsing breaks. II. 1+c 2+d 3+a 4+e 5+b III. 1. will come 2. are- are playing 3. studies 4. Will Lan be at home tonight? IV. (1)president (2)friends (3)about. (4)bring. 8. Chemistry. (5)American (6)give. * Có được các ý sau và đúng ngữ pháp thì cũng cho điểm 1. On Wednesday 2. bring them to school 3. His American friend, Liz, gives him a lot of American stamps. V. 1. Nam isn’t very sporty. 2. In the afternoon, he usually comes home and watches videos. 3. Most of the time he lies on the couch in front of the TV. 4. Would you like to watch the films? Bài kiểm tra này yêu cầu các em phải nắm vững các bài đọc trong SGK và ngữ pháp của Unit 4,5,6. b. Homewords( 1) - Review all the knowledge in unit 4, 5, 6 and prepare for the new lesson.. Week 15. Preparing date: /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 39.. / / 2010. / / 2010. CORRECT THE TEST (45minutes) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know their ability to check the test compare with the the keys.Review all the knowledge which they’ve done in the test. b. Skills :Pupils train reading and speaking. c. Education: Making pupils more carefully. 2. Prepare. a. Teacher: Teaching plan. b. Students : Textbook, notebook, review all the knowledge in unit 4, 5 & 6. 3. Procedure a.Check the old lesson( No).

(78) b. New lesson (44’) - Giáo viên trả bài, đưa ra đáp án và biểu điểm chi tiết. - Học xem bài và tự kiểm tra. 1. Nhận xét chung a, Ưu điểm: - Ss do the test themselves. - They can do all the test b, Nhược điểm -There are some Ss can’t do difficult questions or grammar questions because of their misunderstood. 2. Giải đáp thắc mắc …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. c. Homework (1’) - Review all the knowledge which they’ve done in the test. - Prepare for the new lesson: Unit 7: A1. Week 15. Preparing date: / Period 40.. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 1: a1. Student’s work ( p.72-73) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge - Help ss practice comparatives with “fewer / more” to talk about ss’ work. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to understand the new structures and practice them fluently. b. Skills: Improve listening, speaking, reading & writing skills . c. Education: Ss are eduducated to helpful study activities 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures , tape, posters, word cues.…. b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization (1’): - Good morning !.

(79) - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson. No T’s activities b. New lesson : I. Presentation : * Pre teach : - T presents some new words :  an hour : 1 tiếng ( example )  ( to ) last : kéo dài ( translation )  hard ( adj ) : vất vả ( explanation )  late --> later : muộn, muộn hơn ( explanation)  early--> earlier : sớm, sớm hơn (explanation)  few--> fewer : ít, ít hơn (explanation)  many--> more : nhiều , nhiều hơn (explanation) * Check : Ro & Rm + Pre questions prediction ( p.73 ): 1. What time do Hoas classes start and finish? 2. Do your classes start earlier or later? 3. For how many hours a day does Hoa do her homework? 4. Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa? Get feedback. + Presentation dialogue ( A1 on p.72 ) : Let ss listen and check their predictions. Let ss listen again and give model sentences : My classes start earlier than Hoas classes. I work fewer hours than Hoa. + Concept check : - Meaning: Lớp học của tôi học sớm hơn lớp của Hoa. Thời gian làm của tôi ít hơn so với Hoa. - Form: S1+Vs,es +(earlier / later / fewer / more)+ than +S2 - Use: Cách nói so sánh hơn. - Pronunciation : II. Practice : Word cues drill - T runs through all the cues. - Ask ss to give the comparatives. a) Hoas classes: 7.00 }( start ) Our classes : 6.45 } b) The film : 8.45 } ( finish ) The play: 10.00 } c) Hoa : 2 hours } ( work ) Miss Lan: 4 hours } Eg : S1: Hoas classes start later than our classes . S2: I work fewer hours than Hoa . III. Production :. T 8’. Ss’ activities - Listen & repeat in chorus – individually. - Copy down .. - Rewrite words. 6’. - Ss predict individually.. 7’ - listen and give their predictions - listen & repeat after T . - translate into Vietnamese. - give form - say out the use.. 11’ - Run through the cues. - Practice in pairs..

(80) + Make sentences comparing their work with Hoas 10’ -Write individually work, using earlier / later / fewer / more. c. Consolidation : - Retell the contents of the lesson: the way to make 1’ - Retell the main points of the comparative sentences with more / fewer / later / the lesson. earlier. d. Homework : - Do ex 1 work book. 1’ - Copy down homework. -Learn by heart vocabulary and new structure - Do ex 1 at home. grammar. - Prepare for next lesson Unit 7 A2,3.. Week 15. Preparing date: /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 41.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 2: a2, 3. Student’s work. 1. The aims a. Knowledge - Help Ss read for details to compare American Ss’ vacation and Vietnamese Ss’ vacation. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the letter, remember the names of the public holiday. b. Skills: Listening,speaking, reading . c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences. 2.Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson(5’) * Questions: Answer the questions 1. What time do your classes start? 2. What time do they finish? 3. When do you have summer vacation? 4. What will you do during your vacation? - Call ss say out the right sentences. 5. She works ( hard ) than her sister..

(81) 6. I work ( few ) hours than Hoa. * Answers 1. I have summer vacation in June. 2. They finish at 11.30. 3. I have summer vacation in June. 4. I’ll go to ......./visit.............. 5. harder 6. fewer - T correct and give them marks. T’s activities b. New lesson I. Pre reading : * Pre teach : - T presents some new words : - ( to ) celebrate : kỉ niệm ( example ) - Easter : lễ phục sinh ( explanation ) - Thanks giving : lễ tạ ơn ( explanation ) - New year’s Eve : đêm trước ngày giáng sinh (trans ) - Independence Day : ngày quốc khánh (example) - Christmas : giáng sinh ( translation ) *Check : What & Where.. T. Ss’ activities. 6’ - Listen and repeat in chorus - individually - Copy down. - Rewrite the words 5’. * T/F statements prediction : ( A2 p.73 ) - Guess T or F in - Ask ss to predict these sentences are T or F. individually 1. Vietnamese ss have fewer vacations than American students. 2. American ss have the longest vacations in the winter. 3. They don’t have a Tet holiday. 4. Their most importance vacation is New Year’s Day. 5. They usually spend their time with their families on Thanksgiving and Christmas Day. - Get feedback: 1.. 2.. 3.. 4.. 5.. 14’ II. While reading : - Give their predictions - Ask ss to read the text and check their predictions : 1.T 2.F 3.T 4.F 5.T - Read the letter in groups - Ask ss to read the text again and fill in the grids and check. : Vacations Vietnamese ss American ss longest in the summer in the - Read the letter again and vacation summer fill Tet holiday v x.

(82) Thanksgiving Christmas Independence Day Easter New Year’s Eve. x v x v September July 4th 2nd x v Lunar January 1st December 30th III. Post reading :( A3 p.74 ) - Let ss look at the pictures and guess the name of the public holiday in each picture .. - Let ss listen and check their predictions. * Answer key : a) Thanksgiving. b) Independence Day. c) New Year’s Eve. d) Christmas. c. Consolidation : - Retell content of the lesson: the name of some especial days of the year. d. Homework : - Do ex 2 in the workbook. - Remember the new words - Prepare for next lesson.. 13’. - Listen individually and check their prediction. 1’ - Retell content of the lesson 1’ - do the ex2 at home. - Copy down homework..

(83) Week 16. Preparing date: /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 42.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 3: a4. 1. The aims a. Knowledge - Help Ss read for details about a typical student’s life. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and practice fluently. b. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading . c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences. 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedures Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson (5’) * Questions: Answer the questions 1. Which Amarican vacation is the longest? 2. What does Tim do during in his vacation? 3. Talk the name of the public holiday? * Answers 1, Summer vacatiion is the longest in Amarica 2, During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family. 3.. Thank giving/ National day/ independence day/ New year’s Eve(day)/ Christmas. T’s activities. T. New words: * Pre teach : - T elicits some new words : + Period ( n ) : tiết học (example) + Typical ( adj ): điển hình, tiêu biểu. (translation) + Keen ( adj ): nhạy bén , sắc sảo. ( translation) + Lazy ( adj ): lười biếng (synonym) + ( to ) review : nhắc lại. (translation) + Definitely ( adj ): chắc chắn, nhất định. (translation) * Check: R & R * Prediction : - Ask ss to guess the amount of time Hoa spends on. 8’. Ss’ activities. b. New lesson : - Listen & repeat in chorus – individually. - Copy down.. - Rewrite words. 4’ - predict individually..

(84) her work. 1, Hoa goes to work ............. days of week. 2, She has .............period a day. 3, She works .............hours a week. 4, She has about ............. hours of homework every week. 5, Before tests she works ............. hours a week. - Get feedback. 1 ......... 2 ......... 3......... 4......... 5......... * While reading : - Let ss read the text and check their predictions. * Answer key : 1, 6 2, 5 3, 20 4, 12 5, 45. * Comprehension questions : LUCKY NUMBERS - T presents the way to play this game. Then share the class into 2 teams. 1.a 2. LN 3.e 4.f 5.c 6.LN 7.b 8 d Qs: a--> d on p.75. e. Does Hoa have to work at home? f. Do you work fewer or more than Hoa? * Key : a. Because they don’t know Ss have to work hard at school and at home. b. She works about 20 hours a week. Yes, it is. c. Ss answer. d. No, she doesn’t. e. Yes, she does. f. Ss answer. - Find out the winner. * Post reading : Question and answer ( Orally ) 1. What do you think of a student’s life? 2. Do you think students are lazy?. 18’ - Read the text – check their predictions. -Play the game in 2 teams.. 6’ - Answer the questions.. c. Consolidation : - Retell the contents of the lesson.. 2’. - Retell the main points of this lesson.. d. Homework : - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do the exercise 3,4 – workbook. - Prepare for next lesson.. 1’. - Copy down homework. - Do the exercise at home.. Week 16. Preparing date: /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 43.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 4: B1.

(85) 1. The aims a. Knowledge - Help Ss read Tim’s letter about his parents’ job and getting further practice in the simple present. Listening for specific details. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the letter easily, listen information exactly then take notes. b. Skills: Listening,speaking, reading . 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedures * Organization : - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson( 5’) - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions : * Is Hoa a hard- working student? * How many hours does she work a week? - T correct and give them marks. T’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : READING 1. Pre reading : 7’ *Pre teach : T elicits some new words - Listen and repeat in chorus+ ( to ) take care of : chăm sóc.(explanation) individually. +( to ) work part – time : làm nửa ngày (translation) - Guess the meanings. + ( to ) repair : sửa chữa (explanation ) - Copy down. + ( to ) play golf : chơi gôn (example ) + mechanic ( n ) : thợ máy (translation ) + a machine : máy móc ( explanation ) + shift (n) : ca trực ( translation ) + homeless (adj) : vô gia cư, ko nhà cửa (example ) * Check : R & R - Rewrite words. * Ordering ( for main ideas ) 5’ - Ask ss to predict the order of the main - Predict individually. ideas. a, Mr Jone’s work. b, Tim’s introduction of his family. c, Mr Jone’s vacation time. d, Mrs Jone’s work. - Get feedback: 1.... 2..... 3...... 4...... . Copy down 2. While reading : B1-p.76 15’ - Ask Ss to read the text carefully. - Read the text 2 times and give - Let Ss read it again and check their key..

(86) prediction * Key : 1.b 2.d 3.a 4.c * Comprehension questions : a, She works at home. b, She cooks lunch for homeless people. c, He is a mechanic. d, He usually works about 40 hours a week. e, They have a great time there and Mr Jone plays more golf. 2. Post- reading : B1-p.76 a) Adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often , sometimes , never. * Vị trí: - đứng sau: “ to be ” - đứng trước: “ ordinary verbs ” Eg : I always go to school on Monday . She is never late for school. b) Comparisons : * Model sentences: He has fewer days off than my Mom - Let ss retell forms and then do exercise in groups.. - Practice in pairs.. 10’ - Listen and Copy down. - Ss retell forms and then do exercise in groups.. * S1 + V(s/es )+ more / fewer / less + n + than + S2. - have / has * Note : good – better – the best bad - worse – the worst * Drill 1 : Đặt trạng từ vào đúng vị trí trong câu: - Ask ss to do it in groups of 5. 1. We play soccer in the street. ( never ) 2. My father is busy on Sunday. ( always ) 3. He sends me a present. ( sometimes ) 4. They don’t go swimming in the winter. (often ) 5. What do you do at recess? ( usually ) * Drill : Cho dạng so sánh thích hợp của tính từ trong ngoặc : 1. Mr Tan works (many) hours than my father. 2. He drinks ( little ) wine more than Mr Hai 3. VN students have (few) vacations than American students.. - Practice in groups of 5..

(87) - T gets feedback. * Answer key : * Drill 1 1. ..... never play..... 2. .....is always..... 3. ..... sometimes sends ...... 4...... ofen go ..... 5.What do you usually do..... ? * Drill 2 1. more 2. less 3. fewer c. Consolidation : - Retell the content of the lesson. d. Homework : - Learn by heart all the new words. - Remember some information about Tim’s family. - Write about Phong and you.. Week 16. Preparing date: /. / 2010. - Give the answers.. 1’ 1’. - Retell the main points of the lesson.. - Copy down homework. - Do the ex at home.. Teaching date:. Period 44.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 7: The world of work Lesson 5: b2,3,4. 1.The objectives a. Knowledge - Help Ss practice comparatives with “ more / less / fewer ”. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and the structures clearly then practice fluently. + Know about the work of Tim’s father and Hoa’s father and compare between them. + Listen to the tape and take note the information about the name, job, hour per week and amount of vacation b. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading . c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.....

(88) b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedures * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson(4’) * Questions: Answer the questions 1. How many hours per week does Mr jone work? 2. What does Mrs Jone do for homeless people? * Answers 1, 40 hours per week 2, She cooks lunch for homeless people - T corrects their mistakes and give them marks. T’s activities. T. Ss’ activities. b. New lesson : I. Presentation : * Pre teach : T presents some new words : + pig (n) : con lợn. 6’. (picture). + main crop (n): mùa vụ chính. - Listen and repeat in chorus – individually.. (example). +buffalo shed (n): chuồng trâu (explanation). - copy down. + chicken coop (n): chuồng gà (explanation) + (to)feed : cho ăn. ( example). + (to) rest : nghỉ. (example). + (to) clean : lau chùi, dọn dẹp (situation) * Check : What and Where. * Presentation text :B2 p.77 - Let ss read the text about Mr Tuan and using the information from the table (B3) to fill in the grid (p77). - T models sentences : Mr Tuan works more hours than Mr Jones. Mr Jones works fewer hours than Mr Tuan. Mr Jones has more vacation time than Mr Tuan. Mr Tuan has less vacation time than Mr Jones.. - Rewrite words. 10’ - Read the text individually. Then fill in the grid. T- class side- side individually.

(89) - Concept check : Meaning : translate into Vietnamese Form : Comparisons : Adjectives. 7’. - Give form and use.. 4’. - Run through the cues.. - Let ss retell forms and then do exercise in groups. a) S1 + be + short – adj + er + than + S2. more + long – adj + than + S2. b) S1 + V(s/es )+ more / fewer / less + n + than + S2. * have/has c)S1 + be + the + short-adj_ est . most + Long-adj. II. Practice : Word cues drill : using the grid in B3 p.77.. - Practice. - T runs through all the cues. Eg : I work fewer hours than Hoa.. - write the comparisons.. + Minh / do exercise / more / Lan + She / clean / chicken coop / fewer / her brother. -B4/p78: LISTENING 1. Open predictions : 2’ - Ask ss to predict what Peter / Susan / Jane and Phong does and fill in the “ job ” column in the grid ( B4 p.78 ). - Get feedback. Name Job Hours per Amount of week vacation Peter Susan Jane Phong 2.While listening 5’ - Ask ss to listen and check their predictions. - Let ss listen again and fill in the grid. + Key : * Question and answer : - Ask ss to answer the qs in pairs. a, What’s Peter’s job ? b, How many hours a week does he work ? c, How much time does his vacation last ? III. Production : 4’. - Predict in 4 groups.. - Listen the tape twice. - Fill in the grid. - Work in pairs.. - Write about Susan / Jane in.

(90) - Write about you and 4 people: Peter / Susan / Jane and Phong. Eg : Peter is a doctor . He works about 70 hours a week. He has 4 weeks vacation each year. c. Consolidation : - Retell the form of the lesson. d. Homework: - Learn by heart voca and structures, grammar.. individually.. 1’. -. Retell the main points of this lesson.. 1’ -. Copy down homework.. - Do all exercises in workbook. - Prepare for next lesson.. Week 17. Preparing date: /. / 2010. Teaching date:. Period 45.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 8: places Lesson 1: a1, 2 1.The objectives a.Knowledge - Help Ss understand and remember the names of places; learn how to ask for and give directions. - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to ask for and give directions. *Grammar: - Could you tell / show me the way to the supermarket? Go straight ahead. Take the first street on the right. It’s in front of you. *Vocabulary: - railway station, a souvenir shop. b. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading . c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson(4’) * Question: Answer the question ? Talk some sentences talking about Peter and susan? * Answers - Peter is a doctor, He work 70 hours a week. He has 4 week hours vacation each years.

(91) - Susan is a nurse. She works 50 hours a week. She has one week vacation each year. Teacher’s activities b. New lesson : I. Presentation : * Pre- teach: T elicits some new words. + National Bank of Vietnam( n ): Ngân hàng Quốc Gia Việt Nam + HaNoi railway station ( n) : Ga Hà Nội ( picture) + Dong Xuan Market (n): Chợ Đồng Xuân ( picture ) + Saint Paul Hospital (n): Bệnh viện Sanhpôn ( picture ) + The Central Post-office (n): Bưu điện trung tâm ( picture ) + Souvenir shop (n): Cửa hàng bán đồ lưu niệm ( example ) * Check: matching: - Ask ss to mach the places to the pictures. * Presentation text : ( A2 p.80 ) - T presents the situations of the text then give the model sentences : Qs: Could you (tell/ show ) me ( the way / how ) to get there ? Ans: - Go straight ahead. Take the first street. - Go straight to the first street .Turn right. * Concept check : - Meaning : translate into Vietnamese - Form: Hỏi: Could you + tell/show + me + how/the way+ to...? Trả lời:- Dùng các giới từ chỉ vị trí để chỉ dẫn: - Go straight ahead/ Turn left/right/ Opposite, in front of... - Use: Cách hỏi đường và trả lời. - Pronunciation: falling at the end of the qs and ans. II. Practice : Work in pairs and make the similar dialogues. III. Production : * Brainstorm : In front of behind opposite on the right on the left near next to between * Picture Drill : - Let Ss look at the street map and practice speaking : Eg: S1: Could you tell me the way to the bank ? S2: Ok. You go straight ahead. Take the first. T 8’. Ss’ activities - Listen and repeat. - do individually. - Matching. 15’ - give meaning.. - give form and use.. 10’ - Work in pairs 5’. - Ss look at the pictures, then practice T – Ss side – side.

(92) street. The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the hospital.. c. Consolidation : - Retell the form: asking for and giving directions. d. Homework : - Do ex 4 – workbook. - Learn by heart all the new words. - Prepare for next lesson.. Open pairs Close pairs. 1’ - Retell the form. 1’ - Copy down homework.. Week 17. Preparing date: / Period 46.. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 8: PLaces Lesson 2: A3. 1.The objectives a.Knowledge - Help Ss understand and remember the names of places; learn how to ask for and give directions. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give directions to places more practically. However, they can review the structure: How far is it from ….. to ….. ? *Grammar: - Could you tell / show me the way to the supermarket? Go straight ahead. Take the first street on the right. It’s in front of you. *Vocabulary: - railway station, a souvenir shop. b. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading ..

(93) c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences. 2. Teaching aids a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson(4’) * Question: Answer the question ? Could you tell me the way to the bank ? * Answers Ok. You go straight ahead. Take the first street. The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the hospital. Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities T: Ask ps to ply game Network about the Ss: Play : in/ on/ between/ prepositions of places opposite/ near/ next/ on the T: Today we’ll use the prepositions to ask for and right/ on the left/....... give the directions to some places the places - Listen to teacher T: Hang on the paper board ( a map like A3) - Let Ss look at the street map and practice speaking the name of these offices and stores:. 3. Look at the map. Practice the dialogue with a partner - Ss look at the pictures, then practice - toy store(n) - shoes store(n) - police station(n). T: Guide Ss to read new words & the name of the places in the map T: Call some ps to read & correct if need T: Call 2 pairs to read the example Eg: S1: Could you tell me the way to the bank ? S2: Ok. You go straight ahead. Take the first street. The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the hospital. Take notes: Take the first/ second …. Street on the left/ right = turn left/ right to the first/ second street.. - Practice reading - Pairs work - Ss look at the pictures, then practice T – Ss side – side Open pairs Close pairs a, Ask and answer.

(94) ?: Practice in pairs to ask and answer the places in box & in the map? T: Call some pairs to pactice in the class and call Ss to comment & correct if have. Example: - Where is the bank? - The bank is between the hotle and the restaurant. It ‘s opposite the hospitall. ? Repeat the structure to ask the place? * Structure : Asking the place Where + be + S? - S + be + preposition.......... T: Ask Ss to look at the map again & listen to the tape & write the names of shops, offices you hear following the dirrections to the tape( Play the tape 2 or 3 times) T: Ask Ss to share and compare with a partner & call Ss to answer - Ask Ss to listen and write the places: Eg: The school is opposite the bookstore..... T: Let Ss listen the last time & chect the correct , give keys P: Copy down. c. Consolidation. - Asking and answering about the way.. T: Correct if need ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? P: New words / phrases /ask the place Where + be + S? - S + be + preposition.......... d. Home work - Learn the new words and structure by heart and make examples - Practice reading the text A4 & make similar dialogue about asking the way. - Do exercise A3,4 unit 8 in the workbook. - Prepare UNIT 8 LESSON 3 : A 4, 5- Remember.. Week 17. Preparing date: / Period 47.. / 2010. Where + be + S? - S + be + preposition.......... b, Listen and write the places. - Listen and write the right places. *Key: a/ souvenir / shop b/ shoe store c/ hotel d/ drugstore e/ hospital - Listen and remember. - Copy - Do at home.. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010.

(95) Unit 8: PLaces Lesson 2: A4,5. 1.The objectives a. Knowledge - Help Ss to further practice with “How far ...?” to talk about distance. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue, talking about the distance with “How far...?” fluently. b. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading & writing . c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences, and love learning English and love their home villages 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3.Procedures * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson(4’) * Question: Answer the question ? Give question- ask & answer the way to the stadium * Answers - Could you show me the way to the stadium?/ Could you tell me how to get the stadium? - T corrects and gives them marks Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : I. Presentation : *Pre teach : - T presents some new words: 4’ - Listen and repeat after T in + a long way : một quãng đường dài. chorus then individually. + It takes (time) to get there: đến đó thì mất khoảng thời gian... Eg: It takes a long way from here. It’s takes about 18 hours to get there by coach. II. Practice : 17’ * Predict dialogue (A4 p.82): - Predict individually. - Let ss look at the poster and fill in the blanks : Lan : You’re from Hue. How far is it from Ha Noi ? Hoa : It’s a long way. It’s taken about 18 hours to get there by coach. I think It’s about (1)_ . Lan : And how far is it from Ho chi minh city ? Hoa : About (2) . - Let ss listen to the dialogue carefully and - Listen to the tape 3 times. then check their predictions. - Check their predictions. * Answer key : 1) 680 km 2) 1,030 km.

(96) * Mapped dialogue : Lan Hoa Vinh ............ Ha Noi 319 km Hue ............ Ha Noi 688 km Da Nang ............ Ha Noi 791 km HCM city............ Ha Noi 1,726 km * Eg : S1 : How far is it from Vinh to Ha Noi ? S2 : It’s about 319 kilometers . .............. III. Production : - Ask ss to practice in pairs ,using the street map (a) and the table (b) in ex 2.L.F 3 on p.96 to give a directions. Eg : S1 : Could you tell me how to get the park ? S2 : Go straight ahead . It’s next to hairdresser’s. S1 : How far is it from the shoe store to the park ? S2 : It’s .......... - T goes around the class and correct the typical mistakes. c. Consolidation : - Retell the way to ask and answer the distance with “How far..?” d. Homework : - Learn by heart all the new words and the structures. - Do ex 2(b)– L.F 3 – p.96. - Prepare UNIT 8 LESSON 4 : B 1,2. Week 17. Preparing date: /. / 2010. T - Ss side- side Open pairs Close pairs. 16’. - Practice in pairs.. 2’ - Retell the structures.. 1’. - Write a conversation about giving directions at home. Copy down homework. Teaching date:. Period 48.. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 8: PLaces Lesson 3: b1,2 (p83) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge: - Help Ss understand the content of the dialogue, then practice to ask and answer the price and practice in “need / would like” and post office vocabulary..

(97) - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listening the conversation between Liz and clerk well then they practice to ask and answer the Qs carefully. Understand the dialogue and practice in “need / would like” fluently. + Ask and answer about the prices: How much is/are + S? How much does /do + S+ cost? + Review structure: Would...like + N/ to+V....? b. Skill: Practice listening, reading the dialogue at the post office c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences, know to communicate in public and love learning English. 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedures * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a.Checking the old lesson(5’) * Question: Answer the question How far is it from your house to the postoffice/ market/ police station? How far is it from Mla to Sla/ Hanoi? Where is your house/ School? * Answers It is about... km/m It is near/ next to/ opposite/between................. Teacher’s activities b. New lesson : I. Pre – listening : * Pre teach : - T presents some new words : + envelope (n) : phong bì ( realia ) + stamp (n): tem ( realia ) + (to) send a letter : gửi thư ( example ) + (to) mail a letter : gửi thư điện tử (explanation ) + (to) cost : chi phí ( explanation ) + change (n): tiền lẻ, tiền thừa (example) * Check: What and Where. * True / False predictions : 1. Liz’s like to send a letter to the Great Brighton. 2. She needs some envelopes. 3. They’re 2,500 dong. 4. The stamps for her letter costs 9,00 dong. 5. The envelopes and the stamps are 11,500 dong. - T gets feedback. II. While – listening :. T 5’. Ss’ activities -Listen and repeat in chorus – individually. - Copy down. - Rewrite words. 4’. - Predict individually. - give their predictions.. 9’.

(98) - Ask Ss listen to the dialogue and check their predictions. * Answer key : 1,F 2,T 3,F 4,F 5,T * Lucky numbers : - Let ss play the game in 2 teams. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Qs : 1. Where is the nearest Post office ? 2. L. N 3. Where will Liz mail her letter to ? 4.How much is the letter to the USA ? 5. How much does the envelopes Liz need ? 6. LN 7. how much does Liz pay altogether ? 8. How much change does Liz have ? - Find out the winners.. - Listen and check.. - Play a game in 2 teams. 1, Ss answer. 3, .... to the USA. 4, 9.500 dong 5, 2.000 dong 7, 11.500 dong 8, 3.500 dong. III. Post – listening : Answer about you : d, Where is your nearest post office ? e, How do you get there from your house ? Eg : - My nearest post office is about 500 meters from my house.......... .. 3’. IV. Pre reading : * Pre teach : - T presents some new words : - a local stamp : tem địa phương (example) - writing pad (n): giấy viết thư ( realia ) - phone card (n) : thẻ gọi điện thoại (realia) - overseas mail (n): thư gửi ra nước ngoài (example) * Check: Slap the board. * Open prediction : - Let Ss predict three things Hoa wants from the post office. - Gets feedback. V. While reading : - Ask Ss to read the text carefully. - Read it again and check their predictions. * Answer key : Hoa needs :  Some local stamps  Some stamps of overseas mail.  A phone card. * Comprehension questions ( a-->c p.84 ) - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the Qs. a, She need some local stamps and some stamps for overseas mail.. 5’. - Answer the qs by writing.. -Listen and repeat in chorusindividually. - Copy down. - Play a game in 2 teams. - Predict individually. 7’ - Read the dialogue in pairs. - Check their predictions.. - Work in pairs..

(99) b, Because she has a pen pal in America. c, Because she wants to phone her parents once a week. - T corrects their mistakes. VI. Post reading : - Ask ss to write a letter to their close friend to talk about their families. c. Consolidation: - Retell the content of the lesson: the way to ask about the price and the contents of the dialogue. d. Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Practice speaking. - Complete their writing. - Prepare for next lesson.. Week 18. Preparing date: / Period 49.. / 2010. 4’ - Do individually to write a letter. 2’ - Retell the main points of the lesson. 1’ - Copy down homework - Complete the writing at home. - Remember.. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Unit 8: PLaces Lesson 5: b 3,4,5.. 1. The objectives a. Knowledge: - Help Ss listen for the details then further practice in post office vocabulary and telling the price. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and practice in post office and tell the price fluently and asking some information at the post office b. Skill: Practice listening, reading the dialogue at the post office c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences,know to communicate in public and love learning English. 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads,visual aids ,pictures ,a tape a stereo.... b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedures. * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson(5’) * Question: Answer the questions.

(100) Ask Ss to ask and answer the Qs given. What do you say when you want to know the price? How much is a local stamp? * Answers How much + be + S ? - S + be + price.... How much + do/does + S+ cost? - S + cost (s) + price..... - A local stamp is 800 dong - T corrects and gives them marks. T’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : A. Pre listening : 4. Listen and write the price of each of these five items. * Open prediction (B4-p.85). 4’ - Predict in individually.. - total (adj) tổng cộng - add up (v) cộng lại - Let Ss look at the picture B4 and predict what Mrs. Robinson will buy...Then predict how much she spends on each of these five. - Listen in individually.. items. - Gets feedback. B. While listening :. 10’ - Check their predictions. - Ask Ss to listen carefully. - Ask Ss to listen again and check their prediction about the order. * Answer key : 1, envelopes 3, a writing pad. 2, a pen. 4, stamps 5, a phone card.. - Ask Ss to listen again and check the price. * envelopes : 2,000 d. * a pen : 1,500 d. * a writing pad :3,000d * stamps : 500 d / each. * a phone card : 50,000d. - Ask Ss to answer the questions :. -Do in 2 groups.. a, what is the total cost ?. a, The total cost is 59,000d.. b, How much change will Mrs. Robinson. b, She’ll have 1,000 in change.. have from 60,000 ?.

(101) C. Post listening : B5-p.85 5. Answer the flowing questions - apart from(prep) Ngoài ra - sell(v) bán - Ask Ss to practice speaking in pairs.. 10’ - Work in pairs.. - Gets feedback and corrects. D. Practice. 3. Complete the dialogue. Have Ss complete the dialogue. Answer key : like- are-much-is-that-change.. 10’ - Read the dialogue in pairs. 9’. E. Further Practice. Have Ss make up similar dialogues, use the words in the box. c. Consolidation:. - Work in pairs. 1’. - Ask Ss to retell the content of the lesson:. -Retell the main points of this. how to say the price.. lesson.. How much + be + S ? - S +be +price.... How much + do/does + S? - S + cost (s) + price..... T: Feetback to ps listen & remember d. Homework:. 1’. - Revision all the grammar and vocabulary that you’ve learnt.. - Copy down homework. - Prepare for next lesson.. Week 18+19. Preparing date: / / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010.

(102) Period 50-53.. consolidation. 1. The objectives a. Knowledge: - Help Ss review all the tenses, prepositions, adverbs of frequency and question words…. -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the structures clearly and do exercises correctly. b. Skill: Practice listening, reading, writing and speaking. c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences,know to these structure and love learning English. 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books,tools,extraboads. b. Students: Lessons,books,notebooks,studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson(5’) * Question: Answer the questions - What is the total cost? - How much change will Mrs Bobinson have from 60,000dong? * Answers + The total costs/ is 59,000dong + She has 1,000 dong in change from 60,000d T’s activities T Ss’ activities Period 50+51 I. Tenses: 45’ 1.Present simple tense: - Ss answer. - Ask Ss to retell form and use : * Form: - TO BE (+) S + am/is/are + O. - Ss retell form. (- ) S + am/is/are – not + O. (?) Am/Is/Are + S + O? - ORDINARY Verbs : (+) S + V(s/es) + O. (- ) S + don’t / doesn’t + v + O. (?) Do / Does + s + V + O? * Drill : Put the verbs into the correct tense : a, Lan ( be ) a student . b, They (be) a farmer ? c, We ( play ) soccer . d, She always ( skip role ) in her free time. - Do in 3 groups. e, Nam ( watch ) TV . f, Hoa and I ( go ) to the post office. - Gets feedback : a, is b, Are they....? c, play d, skips rope e, watches f, go 2. Present continuous tense :.

(103) (+) S + to be + V-ing + O. (-) S + be-not + V-ing + O. (?) Be + S + V-ing + O ? - Use: Dùng để diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra ngay tại thời điểm nói. - Thường đi với các từ: now , at present , at the moment , look, listen .... * Ask ss to give some examples. 3. Future simple tense: (+) S + will/shall + V + O. (- ) S + will/shall-not + V + O. (?) Will / Shall + S + V + O? - Use : Dùng để diễn tả hành động sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai. * Drill : Change into (- ) and ( ? ) : a, Lan goes to school everyday . b, My father will go to Ha Noi next Sunday. c, They are listening to music . - Ask ss to do exercise. - T gets feedback : a, Lan doesn’t go to school everyday. Does Lan go to school everyday? b, My father will not go to Ha Noi next Sunday. Will your father go to Ha Noi next Sunday? c, They are not listening to music. Are they listening to music? Period 52 II. Question words : o How much : hỏi về số lượng (N ko đếm đc), giá tiền. o How many : hỏi về số lượng (N đếm được). o How far : hỏi khoảng cách. o How long : hỏi về khoảng thời gian, chiều dài. o Could you tell/show me the way to...?: hỏi đg đi. III. Preposition of the place : o on : ở trên . o opposite: đối diện o between ... and ...: giữa ... và ... o from ... to ...: từ ... đến ... IV. Adverbs of frequency :  always ( vvvvv ): luôn luôn .  usually ( vvvv ) : thường thường.  ofen ( vvv ) : thường hay .  sometimes ( vv ) : thỉnh thoảng.. - Ss retell form and use.. - Give note and some example.. - Retell form and use.. - Do exercise in individually.. 45’ - Ss retell one by one.. - Retell all the Vietnamese meaning.. - Retell.

(104)  seldom ( v ) : hiếm khi .  never ( - ) : không bao giờ. * The position: Đứng sau TOBE ( CAN/ COULD/MAY/MIGHT/DO/DOES/HAVE/HAS..,) và trước các động từ thường * Complete the sentences with an adverb of frequency : a, Tim play soccer . ( usually ) b, Nam reads a library book and comics . ( sometimes ) c, I am a good student in class 7A. ( always ) 45’ Period 53 V. Comparison * Comparative with adjectives S + V + short adj + er + than .. more + long adj + than.... * Superlative with adjectives S + V + the + short adj + est ...... the + most + long adj.... ex: He is taller than me. Tam is the most beautiful. * Comparative with nouns Little less + unc noun Many/much more + count /unc noun Few fewer + count noun VI. Verb form  be good at / be interested in / enjoy / practice / love / like / What about + V-ing Would you like To learn + to V…? Let’s / Why don’t you / Should you / can / should + V-bare VII. Exclamatory sentence( câu cảm thán) What + a / an + adj + N(singular) ! What + adj +. - Do in individually. - Retell the request of the teacher quickly. - Remember.. N(plurar) N(uncountable). a: trước phụ âm an: trước nguyên âm (a , o, e, u, i => awful….) c. Consolidation : - Ask Ss to retell all the knowledge that they’ve consolidated in this lesson. d. Homework : - Review the vocabulary and grammar structures. - Do all exercises. - Prepare for next Writing test.. - Retell the main points. - Copy down homework..

(105) Week 18. Preparing date: / Period : 54. / 2010. Teaching date:. / / 2010. / / 2010. Test for semester I (45minutes) 1. The aims. a. Knowledge. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know their ability to do the test with their knowledge have learnt in semester I. b. Skill. Improve communicative skills ( reading, listening, writing) and language focus , work in individual to complete sentences and a passage. c. Education. Educate Ss to do own something. 2. Prepare. a. Teacher Teaching plan, the photos of questions b. Students Learn the old lesson, pens. 3. Procedure. The test is done as the plan of Muong La education and training office..

(106) The second semester. Week 20. Planning date: ..... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 55.. Unit 9: At home and away Lesson 1: a1 (p 86 - 87) 1. The objectives a. Knowledge: Help Ss talk about vacation activities using “was / were, wasn’t / weren’t”. -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and practice fluently. + Learn the structures with past simple tense and use the past simple tense. . b. Skill: Practice listening, reading, writing and speaking. c. Education:Ss are educated to make formal sentences, know to use these structures and love learning English. 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books, tools, extraboads, tape and radio. b. Students: Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Proceduce * Organization: - Good morning! - Who’s absent today? a. Checking the old lesson (No) * Warm up( 2’) ? Where is it in the picture? ( It’s in Nha Trang) ? Who are talking in the dialogue?( Ba and Liz) Introduce: In the lesson today, You will hear a convasation between Ba and Liz. T’s activities. T. Ss’ activities. b. New lesson : I. Presentation : - Pre teach : - T presents some new words : aquarium (n) : bÓ , hå c¸ ( example ) souvenir (n) : quµ tÆng ( explanation ) be --> (was/were) : th× , lµ , ë ( revision ) have --> had : cã ( revision ) take --> took : nhËn ( example ) go --> went : ®i ( mime ). 7’. - Listen and repeat in chorus, individually.. - Guess the meaning. - Copy down..

(107) buy --> bought : mua. ( explanation). - Matching.. * Check : Matching . * Ordering : Listen and number the verbs you hear :. 2’. - T reads: Liz went to Nha Trang with her parents. They took her to Tri Nguyen aquarium. Liz bought a lot of gifts. The Robinsons had a great time in Nha Trang. * Key : 1,went 4,had. 2,took. 5’. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and then number the sentences on p.87. 1d. 2b. - Work in groups of 4.. 3,bought. * Presentation dialogue ( A1 ) :. - Gets feedback : 5e. - Listen in individually then number the verbs they hear.. 3a. 4c - Matching.. * Matching: Ask Ss to match what Liz’s thought of Nha Trang. The people. expensive. The food. friendly. The things. beautiful. The vacation. delicious. Nha Trang. wonderful. II. Practice : Word cues drill :. 5’. 12’. - Ask Ss to run through all the cues.. - Run through the cues. T – class. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs.. Side – side. a, vacation / wonderful;. Open pairs. b, Nha Trang / beautiful. Close pairs. c, food / delicious; d, things / expensive e, people / friendly Example: S1 : How was the vacation ? S2: It was wonderful. III. Production : Guessing game : - T explains the way to play this game. - Example: Last vacation I was in ................. 10’. - Asking and answering to guess ..

(108) S1: Were you in ............... ? S2: Yes, I was / No, I wasn’t. c. Consolidation :. 2’. - Retell some irregular verbs.. - Ask Ss to retell the past form. ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? - New words and past simple tense (+) S + V(pI).......... (-) S + be not + ....../ didn’t + V...... (?) Be + S +....../ Did + S + V....? - Yes, S + be/did. - No, S + be not/ didn’t. T: Feetback to ps remember. d. Homework:. 1’. - Copy down homework. - Do ex1 at home.. - Do ex 1 – workbook – Unit 9. - Learn by heat all the verbs in the past - Prepare for the new lesson : Unit 9 : A2. Week 20 Planning date: ..... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 56.. Unit 9: At home and away Lesson 2: a2 (p 87 - 88) 1.The objectives a. Knowledge: Reading for details about the Robinson’s vacation. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text and answer questions correctly. + Continue practising the past simple tense and change into past simple tense in regular and irregular . b. Skill: Practice listening, reading the passage, writing and speaking the answers. c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences, know to say events in past simples tense and love learning English. 2. Preparation a. Teacher: Books, tools, extraboads, tape and radio. b. Students: Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Proceduce * Organization: - Good morning! – Who’s absent today?.

(109) a.Checking the old lesson( 5’ ) * Question : ? Give examples with past simple tense in (+) (-) (?) * Answers : Make examples with these structures (+) S + V(ed).......... (-) S + be not + ....../ didn’t + V...... (?) Be + S +....../ Did + S + V....? - Ask ss to give past form of the verbs :  be -->  take -->  buy -->  have -->  visit -->  go --> ? Correct these sentences? - Did you bought any flowers? - She has a new schoolbag lastweek P: Correct: - Did you buy any flowers? - She had a new schoolbag lastweek. - T corrects and gives them marks. Introduce: In the lesson today, You will continue practising the past simple tense and change verbs from present simples to past simple tense in regular of irregular . T’s activities b. New lesson : I. Pre reading : * Pre teach : - T presents some new words : shark (n) : c¸ mËp ( translation ) dolphin (n) : con c¸ heo ( picture ) crab (n) : con cua ( realia ) cap (n) : mò lìi trai ( realia ) turtle (n) : con rïa biÓn ( translation ) exit (n) : lèi ra ( explanation ) fish (n) : c¸ ( explanation ) * Check: What and where. * Matching : - Ask Ss to match : eat wore see thought wear ate think saw * True / False prediction : - Ask Ss to predict : 1, The Robinson went to Tri Nguyen aquarium. 2, They saw many types of fish. 3, Liz bought a little turtle. 4, They had lunch at a food stall. 5, Liz ate fish and crab. II. While reading : - Let Ss read the text carefully. - Ss read the text again and check their predictions : * Key: 1T 2T 3F 4T 5F. * Comprehension questions: Lucky numbers.. T 6’. 2’. 6’. 12’. Ss’ activities - Listen and repeat in chorus , individually. - Guess the meaning. - Copy down. - Rewrite words. - Matching Work individually. - Predict T or F in individual.. -Read the text and check their predictions..

(110) - Ask Ss to play the game by asking and answering the Qs a-->f on p.88. 1a 2b 3 LN 4d 5c 6 LN 7e 8f - Key : a, Her parents went to the aquarium with Liz. b, They saw many types of fish and turtle. c, They bought a cap and a poster. d, Yes, she did . Liz wore the cap all day. e, Yes, they do. Mr. and Mrs. Robinson ate fish and crab. f, Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium.. - Play the game in 2 teams.. III. Post reading : Re- call : - Let Ss look at the pictures a, b, c, d, e on p.88 to tell the story of the Robinson’s trip to the Tri Nguyen Aquarium.. 10’. c. Consolidation : - Retell the contents of the text. ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? ? Look at the part of remember listen and repeat all the verbs in the past? T: Feetback to ps remember.. 2’. d. Homework : - Recall the story about the Robinsons. - Learn by heart all the new words. - Practice reading the text and write a story about you trip which you’ve experimented. - Do exercise A2,3 in exbook. - Prepare for the new lesson : Unit 9 : A3,4,5. 1’. - Retell the story.. - Retell the content of the text. Ss: New words and past simple tense: regular verbs/ irregular verbs Ss: Listen and repeat. - Copy down homework.. Week 20 Planning date: ..... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 57.. Unit 9: At home and away Lesson 3: a3, 4. (p 89 - 90) 1.The aims a. Knowledge - Help Ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson. - Help Ss listen to a text about the Robinsons’ holiday. - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to remember and retell the Robinsons’ holiday..

(111) b. Skill: Practice writing skill, correct informations by listening and reading. c. Education:Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, know to say events in past simples tense and love learning English. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, tools, extraboads, tape and radio. * Students: Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 5’ ) * Questions : 1. Answer 4 questions in the reading from a to d ?(1p) 2. Tell about your trip?(1p) * Answers : 1.a. Liz’s parents went to the aquarium with her. b. Mr Robinsons saw many different fish such as sharks, dolphins and turtels. c. Mr Robinson bought a cap for Liz and Mrs Robinson bought a poster. d. Yes, she did. She wore it all day. 2. Ps’ answer * Warm up( 2’) ? Where did you go last holiday? Where did Liz visist..? P: I/We went to........./ She went to Nha Trang ? What did she do there? Introduce: In the lesson today,We practice sentences in the past simple tense with exercise: Complete sentences and complete the dialogue. Teacher’s activities b. New lesson : * Pre- teach : I. Vocabulary : - T elicits some new words. + roadside (n) : lề đờng ( trans) + peanut (n) : cñ l¹c (realia) + peaceful (adj) : thanh b×nh (explain) + calm (adj) : êm đềm (trans) + unfortunately (adv) : kh«ng may (trans) + (to) rent : thuª (trans) + (to) keep in touch : liªn l¹c (trans) + (to) improve : c¶i tiÕn, trau dåi (trans) - Check : R and R II. Listening ( A 3,4) A- Pre – listening : - T says “ You are going to hear a short paragraph about the Robinsons’ holiday ” - T asks Ss to guess 5 sentences that they think they have in the tapecript. - T gets feedback : B- While – listening : - T asks to listen to the tapecript and write the. T. 5’. 5’. Ss’ activities. - Listen and repeat in chorus individually - Copy down. - Listen and guess 5 sentences. - Write on their notebooks. 7’. 4’. - Retell about the Robinsons’ holiday in Nha Trang.

(112) - Work individually. letter of the sentences they hear. C- Post – listening : - T asks Ss to talk about the Robinsons’ holiday in Nha Trang correctly and fluently. III. Reading ( A4) A- Pre – reading : - T sets the scene “You are going to read about Ba’s diary. He wrote about Liz and her family” - T hangs an extra board on the black board. B- While- reading : - T asks Ss to read all the questions sentences given a-g. - Then T asks Ss to read Ba’s diary and correct the sentences given. - T gets feedback : answer a) Liz lived next door to Ba. b) Liz learned Vietnamese in VN. c) Ba collects stamps. d) Liz’s aunt lives in New York . e) The Robinsons moved to the other side of Ha Noi. f) The Robinsons moved. Now Ba is sad. g) Ba’ll see Liz next week. C- Post – reading : - T asks Ss to retell about the main ideas of Ba diary. - T listens. - T asks Ss to write 4 sentences about what you did last summer holiday: place, what you see, what you bought . c. Consolidation: - T asks Ss what they have learnt today. - T asks Ss to retell the Robinsons’ holiday. d. Homework : - T asks Ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - T asks Ss to read the text again. - T asks Ss to prepare the next lesson.. 2’. 8’. - Read Ba’s diary - Check sentences given - Copy down. - Work individually. 6’. - Listen and retell the main points of the lesson.. 2’. 1’. - Copy down homework. - Learn vocabulary by heart, read the text..

(113) Week 21. Planning date: ....../ 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 58.. Unit 9: At home and away Lesson 4: B1, 2 (p 91-92) Neighbors 1.The aims a. Knowledge: - Help ss understand and remember the words and phrases given in the lesson. - Help ss read for detail and past simple tense with interrogative sentences. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand how to use the past simple tense with interrogative sentences . b. Skill: Practice reading the dialogue in pairs, listening, speaking and writing. c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, know to say events in past simples tense and love learning English. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, tools, extraboads, tape and radio. * Students: Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization : Greeting and checking ss’ attendance. a.Checking the old lesson( 5’ ) * Questions : 1. Read the reading A4 and make sentences a to e true?(1p) 2. Make 5 setences using 5 verbs in the remember ?(1p) * Answers : 1.a, Liz lives next door to Ba b, Liz learned Vietnames in Viet Nam. c, Ba colects stamps. d, Liz’s aunt lives in New York. 2. Ps’ answer b. New lesson Introduce: In the lesson today,We continue practising about the past simple tense Teacher’s activities * Warm up ? Where are in the picture? Where are they? ? What are they doing? b. New lesson : * Pre- teach : I. Vocabulary ;. Tim e 2’. Ss’ activities P: They are Lan and Hoa/ They are in the room P: They are talking...

(114) - T elicits some new words : + (a) hairdresser : thî uèn tãc, thî c¾t tãc (explain) + material (n) : v¶i (realia) + (a)dressmaker : thî may ¸o ®Çm (trans) + (to) make – made : lµm , may(explain) + (to) cut – cut : cắt , đốn (mine) - Check : What and where II. B 1, 2 – Neighbors . + Pre – questions : - T points to the picture and sets the scene :” What does Hoa’s aunt do? / What does Mrs.Mai do ?” - T asks ss to think of the questions. + While- reading : -T asks to read the dialogue between Lan and Ba. - T asks ss to discuss the questions given - T gets feedback: Answer : 1. She is a hairdresser. 2. She is a dressmaker. - T asks some questions : + Are your neighbors friendly? + Do you sometimes help them? + Do they help you? + What do they do for you? + What do they/ you do for them?  Practice : The past simple tense with interrogative sentence. - T presents to give a new target item. Eg : Did your uncle / aunt cut your hair ? - T asks to repeat . * Concept check : Meaning . Form : A: Did + S + V( inf) ? B: Yes, S + did / No, S + didn’t .  Word cues drill : + Hoa buy the dress .( x) + Her aunt make Hoa’s dress .( v) + Her aunt cut Hoa’s hair .( x) + You buy that red hat . ( v ) Eg : Did Hoa buy the dress ?- No, she didn’t . - T gets ss to work in pairs. - T goes round and corrects ss’ mistakes. - T asks ss to write 3 sentences about what you did yesterday. Eg : Yesterday i stayed at home. c. Consolidation :. 7’. - Listen and repeat in chorus individually - Copy down. - Rewrite words. 6’ - Listen - Predict the answers. 18’ - Practice in pairs.. - Work in pairs to answer the qs given: + Yes, they are. + Yes, I do. + Yes, they do.. + Yes , she did. + No, she didn’t. -Translate individually. - Give form and use. 6’. - Run through 1st T – Class . Side - Side Open pairs Close pairs. - Work in pairs. - Do individually..

(115) - T asks ss what they have learnt today. - T guides ss to do exercises . d. Homework : - T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Ask ss to do exercises B 2,4 ( p. 56 , 57) - Prepare for next lesson.. 2’ - Past simple tense with Yes/No questions. 1’ - Listen and copy down homework.. Week 21. Planning date: ..... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 59.. Unit 9: At home and away Lesson 4: b3,4 1.The aims a. Knowledge: - Help ss read a text about Hoa and revise the simple past tense with Wh - qs. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand how to make questions with Whqs in the past simple tense. b. Skill: Practice reading the dialogue in pairs, listening, speaking and writing. c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, know to say events in past simples tense and love learning English. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, tools, extraboads, tape and radio. * Students: Lessons, books, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 6’ ) * Questions : 1. Read the reading B1,2 and answer the questions in B1(1p) 2. Make 5 setences using 5 verbs in the remember ?(1p) * Answers : 1. Reading and answer 2 questions a, She is a hairdresser. b, She is a dressmaker. 2. Ps’ answer Introduce: In the lesson today,We continue practising about the past simple tense. Teacher’s activities Tim Ss’ activities e * Warm up( 2’) P: It’s Hoa. She comes from ? Who is in the picture? What do you know about Hoa? Hue and now she lives with her uncle and aunt in HN....

(116) b. New lesson : I. Pre- teach : T elicits some new words  hobby (n): së thÝch (translation)  sewing (n): viÖc may v¸ (explanation)  Cushion (n): gèi nhùa (translation)  (a) skirt : c¸i v¸y (realia)  useful >< useless : h÷u Ých (translation)  (to) fit – fitted : võa vÆn (example)  (to) sew : may (explanation)  (to) decide(-ed): quyết định (translation)  Check : Matching. A – B3,4 : Pre readimg (B3 p.93) a. Pre qs : T sets the scene : * What do you learn in home economics ? * Do you want to learn how to make a dress ? b. True or false statement predictions : - T gives o poster then asks ss to predict T or F: 1. Hoa thought sewing was a useful hobby. 2. She decided to learn how to sew. 3. She learned how to make a dress. 4. Hoa made a skirt but it was too small. - T gets feedback. B – While reading : - T asks ss to read the text and check their predictions. - T gets feedback : 1-T 2-T 3-f 4-F c.T gets ss to play a game : Noughts and Crosses 1a 2d 3c 4e 5g 6j 7f 8b 9h * Answer : 1. a sewing machine 2. a skirt. 7’. - Listen and repeat in chorus individually - Copy down. - Match words. 6’ - Listen and answer the t’s qs * sewing / knitting * Yes, I do ... 5’ - Look at on the poster and then predict T or F.. 18’ - Read in groups of 4 or 5 ss. - Check their predictions. - Play game in 2 teams to answer the qs given..

(117) 3. blue and white 4. green and white 5. It was too big 6. very well 7. pretty 8. a cushion 9. Her neighbor. C- Post reading : B4 p.93,94 (Writing) - T asks ss to read the request then put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense. - T gets feedback : Answer key * watched * decided ... was * bought * made ... was * cut * wasn’t * used * helped ... fitted c. Consolidation : - T asks ss what they have learnt today. - T guides ss to do exercises . d. Homework : - T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Ask ss to do exercises B 3 ( p. 57 ) - Prepare for next lesson.. 10’ - Read the request and put the verbs in the simple past tense individually. - Give the note : * Wh + did + S + V-inf ? - S + V (past). 3’ - Retell the simple past tense. 1’. -Listen and copy down homework.. Week 21. Planning date: ....../ 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 60.. Unit 9: At home and away Laguage focus 3 1.The aims a. Knowledge: - Revise grammar from unit 7 to unit 9 : how to ask and answer about the price. - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand how to make questions with Whqs in the past simple tense, how to use more , less and fewer and say the price fluently. + Ask and answer about the price and read the number + Preposition of location + The present, past, future simple tense + Compare with noun b. Skill: Practice reading , listening, speaking and writing with words and sentences..

(118) c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, know to review the old knowledge, practice well and like learning English. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 4’ ) * Questions : Give the examples with following verbs: saw, took, made.(1P) * Answers : Give right and suitable examples(use advs of time in the past) Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : A- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words 4’ - Listen and repeat in chorus  minimart (n): chî nhá (synonym) individually  hairdresser (n) : hiÖu c¾t tãc - Copy down (explanation)  violet (adj): mµu tÝm (realia) * Check : Ro and Rm. - Rewrite words. B- Language focus 3 : 1. Ask and answer the price : 8’ * form : How much is it / are they ? - Listen and answer It is / They are + price. - T sets the scene by using the picture :  Dialogue built : Assistant Lan - T – Class - Side – Side - Open pairs How much is the --- > It’s 30.000 d - Close pairs green dress ? How much is the blue ----> It’s 15.000d hat ? - Practice in pairs. And what about the --> It’s 35.000d violet dress? What about the ----> It’s 12.000d yellow hat? - T asks ss to make similar dialogue using the words given by T. - T listens and corrects. 2. The simple past tense : - T asks ss to write the past form of the verbs in the table (p.97) Eg : buy -- > bought - T asks ss to answer some qs about the use, form of the simple past tense : Note : Ordinary verbs are divided into 2 kinds :  regular verbs (- ed ) / (-d)  irregular verbs - T asks ss to do ex b 4 (p.97-98) - T gets feedback. 8’ - Do individually. - Answer individually. - Copy down..

(119) * Answer key : b, played / talked / bought / worked / sent c, help my mom and study English. 3. More / Less and fewer : - Asks ss to say the use of those then write the sentences according to the pictures. Eg : Before : there were 4 bananas Now : there are fewer bananas. 4. Prepositions : - T asks ss to retell some prepositions then look at the map and write the location of each store. a. Eg : The restaurant is next to the bookstore. b. Ask and answer about the distance start with How far ... ? Eg : How far is it from shoe store to minimart ? It’s 500 meters. - Then T aks ss to work in pairs, then corrects. c. Consolidation : - T asks ss what they have consolidated today. - T guides ss to do exercises. d. Homework : - T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Ask ss to complete all the exercies in L.f 3. - Prepare for next lesson.. 10’ - Listen and answer. - Write it up 6’ --> next to / near / opposite / between ... - Pairs work.. 2’ - Review : the simple past tense , say the prices and the distance... - More / less and fewer. 1’ - Copy down homework.. Week 22. Planning date: ...... / 01/ 2011. Period 61.. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Unit 10: health and hygiene. Lesson 1: a1.personal hygiene 1.The aims a. Knowledge: - Help ss read the detail a letter from Hoa’s mom and revision present simple tense. - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to know what Hoa’s mother writes and revise present simple tense well. + Practice the present, past simple tense + Know vocabularies with the title of personal hygiene. + Use structures to say about the activities. b. Skill: Practice reading , listening, speaking and writing with words and sentences. c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, and like learning English and find meaning, speciality of personal hygiene. 2. Preparation.

(120) * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, pictures. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 4’ ) * Questions: 1. Give sentences with words given: What did you do yesterday? (2P) a, Talk to Lan b, buy a book c, go to Son la City d, watch T.V * Answers : a, Yesterday, I talked to Lan b, Yesterday, I bought a book c, Yesterday, I went to Son la City d, Yesterday, I watched T.V * Warm up( 2’) T ask ps some questions ? Do you remember Hoa? what do you remember about Hoa? ? Where did Hoa come from? ? Which school does Hoa study in? ? Where is Hoa living now? who does Hoa live with? ? Where do Hoa’s parents live now? P: Answer/ others comment T: Correct if need Introduce: In the lesson today,We know more information about Hoa... Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : 7’ - Listen and repeat in I- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words chorus individually  personal (adj): thuéc vÒ c¸ nh©n (translation) - Copy down  hygiene (n) : vÖ sinh (translation)  harvest (n) mïagÆt,mïa thu ho¹ch(explanation)  (to) iron : lµ (quÇn ¸o) (mime)  probably (adv) : cã lÏ (translation)  (to) take morning exercise : tËp thÓ dôc buæi s¸ng (explanation)  (to) be bad for + n : cã h¹i cho... (realia) - Match words.  (to) take care: ch¨m sãc (translation) * Check: Matching. II- A1 : Personal hygiene : * Pre reading : Open 5’ - Listen and do predictions individually. - T sets the scene : What did you know about Hoa ? Now we are going to read a letter from Hoa’s mother. - T asks ss to predict what Hoa’s mother writes. Ss to predict what harvest Hoa’s mother writes. Hoa’s mother writes about wash and iron clothes don’t eat too much 14’ - Listen to the tape 1st * While reading : and then check their 1. T asks ss to read the letter from Mom after listen to st prediction. the tape 1 and then check their predictions. - T gets feedback. - Play game into 2 2. Answer the qs (p.100) : teams. - Asks ss to read all the qs , then play game : Lucky number into 2 teams. 2 ln. 1c 6 ln. 3a 7 ln. 4d 8b. 5e 9f.

(121) * Answer : a. Because it is almost harvest time. b. Hoa’s grandfather. c. After the harvest . d. she gets up early and does morning exercises everyday. e. her mother wants her to wash and iron her clothes. f. She wants Hoa doesn’t eat too much candy and stay up late - Then asks ss to write the answer in their notebook. * Post reading : - T asks ss to retell what Hoa’s mother writes about. - Gets feedback. c. Consolidation : - T asks ss what they have consolidated today. - T guides ss to do exercises. d. Homework : - T asks ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Do ex A1(WB and NB). - Prepare for next lesson.. 8’ 3’ 2’. - .Retell in some groups. - Retell the content of the lesson individually. - Copy down homework. Week 22. Planning date: ..... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Unit 10: health and hygiene. Period 62.. Lesson 2: a2, 3.( p 100). 1.The aims a. Knowledge: - Listening a text about Hoa, revise the past simple tense. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what Hoa’s did and they can put the picture in order well. + Practice the present, past simple tense + Know more vocabularies with the title of personal hygiene. + Use structures to say about the activities( daily activites)`. b. Skill: Practice reading , listening, speaking and writing with words and sentences. c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences, and like learning English and find meaning, speciality of personal hygiene. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , ….

(122) 3. Procedure * Organization: Greet and check Ss’ attendance. a.Checking the old lesson( 4’ ) * Questions: Say about what Hoa did and do/ say about Hoa? * Answers : She was from Hue. She lives in Ha Noi with her aunt and uncle. She studies at Quang Trung school. She gets up early, Take morning exercise, Take care of oneself. She does her own washing and ironing her clothes. * Warm up( 2’) T ask ps to play matching 1, receive a, kẹo 2, get up b, là (quần áo) 3, iron c, Nhận 4, candy d, thức dậy P: Answer/ others comment T: Correct if need: 1 - c; 2 -d; 3-b; 4- a. Introduce: In the lesson today,We know more information about Hoa.... Teacher’s activities b. New lesson : A- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words : (to) polish(-ed): đánh bóng (picture) (to) change(-d): thay đổi (explanation) (to) comb(-ed): ch¶i ®Çu ( mime ) (a) comb : c¸i lîc (realia) (to) iron(-ed): lµ quÇn ¸o (mime). T. Ss’ activities. 8’ - Listen and repeat in chorus individually - Copy down. (to) drink – drank ; uèng (mime) pants (n): quÇn ¸o (mÆc ë nhµ) (picture) sandals (n): dÐp (quai hËu) (realia) (to) brush(-ed) (revision) (to) eat – ate. (revision). (to) get – got (revision) * Check : Ro and Rm. B – A2 Listening (p.100); * Pre listening: T sets the scene by using the pictures. 1. Open prediction : - T asks ss to guess what Hoa is doing. Eg : a. She is getting her clothes.... - Then asks ss to predict the order of the. 10’ - Listen and answer the qs individually. -Predict individually. - Share their ideas.. -Listen and check their.

(123) pictures. then T gets feedback. I guess I listen 1. 5. 1- a 5-g 2. 6. 2–e 6-c 3. 7. 3–f 7-h 4. 8. 4–d 8–b * While listening : - T asks Ss to listen to the tape twice or 3 times and check their predictions. - Gets feedback. * Post listening: 2. Writing: Ask Ss to write 8 sentences about what Hoa did using simple past tense. *A3 p.101 : Read Nam’s diary * Pre writing : T asks Ss to give the answer : Qs: Do you often write diary? - Then asks Ss to look at the table and read Nam’s diary twice , and then fill in the table with time or an action - T gets feedback. * While writing: a. T asks Ss to practice to ask and answer the Qs about what Nam does everyday. Eg: T: What does Nam do everyday? S: He gets up early.... T asks Ss to work in pair. - Asks Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer about what your friend does everyday. Eg : S1: What do you do everyday ? S2: What time do you get up? * Post writing : - T asks ss to write 3 or 4 sentences about what they do everyday using the present simple tense. - T goes round and take notes then correct their mistakes. c. Consolidation : - T asks ss what they have consolidated today. - T guides ss to do exercises. d. Homework : - Asks Ss to look at the pictures and write about what Hoa did.. predictions -Individually work.. - Ss to listen to the tape twice or 3 times and check their predictions. - Listen and repeat in chorus individually - Copy down 9’. - Play game into 2 teams. - Answer. 10’. - Do individually and check their predictions. - Pairs work. --> He gets up... -Individually work.. 2’. 1’. - Retell the content of the lesson. - Listen and copy -Cop down homework..

(124) T asks Ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Remember the simple past tense. Week 22. Planning date: ..... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 63.. Unit 10: health and hygiene Lesson 3: a4.personal hygiene 1.The aims a. Knowledge: - Reading Nam’s diary and complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs. - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about what you do everyday and complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs well. b. Skill: Practice reading , listening, speaking and writing with words and sentences. c. Education: Ss are educated to make formal sentences, and like learning English and find meaning, speciality of personal hygiene. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure * Organization: Greet and check Ss’ attendance. a. Checking up: 5' * Questions: - Ask Ss to retell what Hoa did. Write vocabulary * Keys :Ss answer +) Forms of checking : speaking and writing +) Correction, remark , giving mark Teacher’s activities T b. New lesson : 7’ A- Pre- teach : T elicits some new words : strange (adj): l¹ (explanation) (to) worry – worried : lo l¾ng (explanation) carefully (adj) : 1 c¸ch cÈn thËn (translation) must (m.v) : ph¶i (explanation) (to) wash face (revision) (to) brush teeth (revision) (to) comb hair (revision) (to) do morning exercises (revision) (to) take a shower (revision) 4’ * Check: What and Where. B–A4: 20’ 2. A4 : Complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs : - Ask ss to retell what Hoa’s mother write to Hoa , then t presents Hoa’s letter to her mother.. Ss’ activities - Listen and repeat in chorus individually - Copy down - Pairs work. --> He gets up... - Individually work - Pair work. - Work in group.. - Listen and answer.

(125) - T asks ss to read Hoa’s letter and complete the it with suitable verbs. - T gets feedback.. - Read Hoa’s letter and then fill in the gaps with suitable verbs.. * Answer : 1. was 2. having 3. show 4. Take 5. get 6. go 7. wash 8. iron 9. eating 10. told 11. see 12. go.      . - T asks Ss to answer some Qs to check their understanding about Hoa’s letter: To whom does Hoa write a letter How is she doing at school? What does she do everyday? What does she never do? What time does she go to bed? What do you do to take care of yourself? c. Consolidation : - T asks Ss what they have consolidated today, which tense is used ? - T guides Ss to do exercises. d. Homework : - T asks Ss to learn vocabulary by heart. - Complete a diary - Prepare for next lesson.. 6' - Listen and answer --> her mother -->fine --> gets up --> goes to bed late --> 9.30 --> gets up early 2’. 1’. - Retell the content of the lesson.. - Listen and copy.. Week 23. Planning date: ...... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 64.. Unit 10: health and hygiene Lesson 4:b1, 4. (p.103 - 105) A bad toothache. 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to + Ask and answer about the tooth with the words: fill cavity, fix one’s tooth, scared, hurt......... and tell about a visit to the dentist. + Know more vocabularies with the title of personal hygiene & health..

(126) Grammar :- The simple present and past tense What’s the matter ? = What’s wrong ? -word cues, Ask and answer the questions b. Skill: Practice reading , listening, speaking and writing with words and sentences. c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, and like learning English and find meaning, speciality of personal hygiene. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools, … 3. Proceduce a.Checking the old lesson( 5’ ) * Questions: Say 5 sentences to discribe about keeping personal hygiene of yourself. * Answers : Ps’s Answers : get up early/ take care of her self/ take morning exercise/ go to bed early..... Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : 4’ - Have Ss play a game : Hangman Play a game . Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel - Remark . b. New lesson : - Ask Ss some questions such as : Answer the questions . + What will you do if you have a tooth ache? + When you go to the dentist , what will the dentist do ? - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer Look at the picture then the question : What’s the matter with answer the questions . Minh , the boy in the picture ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then Listen and write down . explain some new words to Ss . I. Vocabulary: 7’ + Dentist ( n ) : nha sĩ Guess the meaning , read + An appointment ( n ) : cuộc hẹn, sự hẹn gặp new words in chorus and + Scared ( adj ) : sợ hãi (ai, cái gì…) individually , then copy + Cavity ( n ) : lỗ hổng, lỗ thủng (sâu răngs) down . + To fill ( v ) : làm đầy, trám hàm răng + To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v ) + To hurt ( v ) : đau, bị đau + Drill ( n ) : cái khoan *Checking: Slap the board Play a game : Slap the Have Ss read new words in chorus and board . individually . Two groups take part in the game . II. Listen and practice in pairs: 12’ Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer the Listen to the tape , then find questions : the answers . + What is Minh going to do at 10:30 ? +What happened to Hoa last week ?.

(127) + How did the doctor help Hoa ? Play the tape for Ss . Play the tape again and ask Ss to read after the tape . Ask Ss to answer the questions above . Correct and give the correct answers . Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . Correct their pronunciation . Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions . Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . * Now answer a. Minh has a toothache. b. No, she doesn’t. He hates the sound of the drill, It’s so loud. c. Bacause she has a toothache. d. She filled a cavity in her tooth * About you - Pair work - Answer e. I went to the dentist f. Yes, I am/ No, I am not.. Listen to the tape . Read after the tape . - Answer the questions . Listen . Work in pairs . Practice in front of the class.. 8’ * Play agame: Lucky number 1.Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week ? 2What is wrong with Minh ? 3.LN 4.Does Minh like going to the dentist ? How do you know ? 5.Are you scared of seeing the dentist ? 6.LN 7.What did the dentist do with Hoa’s toothache ? 8.What did you do the last time you had a bad toothache ? 9.LN 10.How does Minh feel after talking with Hoa ? - Demonstrate the result . - remark . - Ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks . 3. Ask and answer. Example: a) tooth/hurt. Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers. Read the dialogue again and find out the answers . Work in pairs . Play a game in groups .. 6’.

(128) have/cavity  Minh's tooth hurts. Why? Because he has a cavity. Have Ss ask and answer in front of the class with words to help them. b, Minh is/feels nervous. Why? Because he is seeing the dentist. c, The cavity is not serious.Why? Because It’s small d, Minh looks worried. why? Because he always forgets to brush his teeth. e, Minh is (very) happy. Why? Because his teeth are Ok.. Answer the questions Write the answers in the notebooks .. 2’. c.Consolidation : - Have Ss play a game : Find someone who?. Find someone who. Play a game. Name. Ask and answer in front of the class. - Write homework.. ….has a toothache ? ….likes going to the dentist ? …is scared of seeing the dentist ?. EX : S1: Do you have a toothache ? S2 : Yes / No S1 : Do you like going to the dentist ? - Remark . d.Homework : - Learn the new words and phrases make 5 sentences to discribe about keeping personal hygiene of yourself( Keeping tooth). - Practice reading the text again and translate into Vietnamese. - Do exercise B1,2 in exbook( page 64). - Prepare for the new lesson : Unit 10 : B2,3. 1’. Copy and do them at home.. Week 23. Planning date: ...... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011.

(129) Period 65.. Unit 10: health and hygiene Lesson 4:b2,3,5*. (p.104). 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about Dr Lai’s job . They continue to practice about the topic of toothache. Listening and reading for details about Dr. Lai’s job to revise the present simple tense. + Continue the tittle of cleaning the teeth. + Know more vocabularies with the title of personal hygiene & health. * Vocabulary: - To explain - To remind - Sensibly - Surgery - To smile - To check - To notice * Grammar: Review: the simple present tense b. Skill: Practice reading , listening, speaking and writing with words and sentences. c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, and like learning English and find meaning, speciality of personal hygiene, and know to take care of themselves. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 5’ ) * Questions: Read the dialogue in pair and answer the questions from a to d( 2 ps) * Answers : - Read and answer a. Minh has a toothache. b. No, she doesn’t. He hates the sound of the drill, It’s so loud c. Bacause she has a toothache. d. She filled a cavity in her tooth Teacher’s activities * Warm up : - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board Appointmen t Cavity. Hurt. Dentist. Toothach e. Scared. b. New Lesson : 1. Listen and answer Introduce the situation of the listening. Ask Ss to read the questions in the book then guess the answers for the questions. Call on some groups to give their answers. Play the tape for Ss checking their predictions. Explain some new words to Ss.. T 5’. 7’. Ss’ activities -Greetings. Play a game. -Two groups take part in the game.. -Listen to the teacher. -Read the questions in the book and guess the answers ( work in groups) -Give the predictions. -Listen and check the predictions. -Listen and write down..

(130)  Vocabulary: + explain ( v ) :gi¶I thÝch ( Trans) + remind ( v ) :Nh¾c nhë( Trans) + Sensibly ( adj ) : Biết điều, hợp lí , điều độ. + Surgery ( n ) :sù gi¶i phÉu, phÉu thuËt. + smile ( v ) : MØm cêi ( revision) + notice ( v ) :Chó ý, lu ý, ghi chó.( Trans) + Serious ( adj ) : nghiªm träng , trÇm träng (trans)  Check: R&R Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.. -Read new words in chorus and individually, guess meaning then copy down. 8’. -. Play the tape again for Ss. Ask Ss to give the answers. Play the tape again for Ss checking the answers. Correct and give the correct answers. a. Dr Lai is a dentist. b. She wears uniform to work. c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai. d. She explains what will happen. She gives them advice. She tells them how to look after their teeth regulary and eat sensibly. - Ask Ss to write down.. 8’. 2. Listen and read. Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions : + What is the matter with Minh? + How does he feel? + What is the doctor doing? + Why does that happen to Minh? - Call on some Ss to give their answers. Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape (two times) - Have Ss read the text in silent. -Call on some Ss to read the text in front of the class. -Ask Ss to complete the story with suitable words. -Have Ss exchange the results with their partners. Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class. *Correct the mistakes then give the answer key : Minh is very nervous/worried and Dr Lai notices this. She smiles at Minh and tells him not to worry. She explains one of his teeth has a cavity. He has to brush them regularly. After Dr Lai fills his tooth, Minh leaves. He is very pleased/happy. Call on some Ss to read the completed the story aloud. 3* Write. Complete this poster with a partner - Look at the picture & Group work & write the. Listen to the tape to check the predictions. Give the answers. Check the answers Write the answers in the notebooks.. -Look at the picture and answer the questions.. Give the answers. Look at the book and listen to the tape. Read the text in silent Read the text aloud. -Complete the story with the suitable words. -Exchange the result with the partner. -Give the answers in front of the class. - Listen and write down.. -Read the story aloud. 8'. ? Look at the picture in B5 and practice in group and write the poster using the imperative? - Call some pupils to read.

(131) poster using the imperative. - Answer/ others coment - Copy Do - Brush the teeth after meals. - Use a tube of toothpast. - See a dentist. Don’t - Use an old tooth brush. - Eat Sweets. c. Consolidation : ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? - New words and phrases about health and hygiene ? Summary about Minh and Dr Lai’s conversation? T: Feetback to ps remember. d. Homework - Learn the new words and phrases make 5 sentences to discribe about keeping personal hygiene of yourself( Keeping tooth). - Practice reading the text again and translate B2 into Vietnamese. - Do exercise B3,4 in exbook - Prepare the next lesson Unit 11: A1. their answers - Correct if need and give the right answers.. 2'. Listen to the teacher.. 2'. -Write homework. - Retell the content of the lesson individually. - Copy down homework. Week 23. Planning date: ...... / 01/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 01 / 2011 ...... / 01 / 2011. Period 66.. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy Lesson 1: a1. a check - up. 1. The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue and give the requests and the responses..

(132) + Know the tittle of keeping fit and stay healthy. * Vocabulary: - Medical check – up/ - To measure / Medical record / - To weigh - Height / - Weight / Temperature / - To take one’s temperature - Scales / - Normal * Grammar: - The structure: Would you + V? - Review: The simple present tense. b. Skill: Practice reading the dialogue in pairs, arrange the sentences in the order - Practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are eduducated about how to keep fit and health, and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 4’ ) * Questions: What should we do to take care of the teeth( 1 ps) * Answers : Answers: We brush the teeth after meals, use a tube of toothpast, and see a dentist. We don’t use an old tooth brush and eat Sweets Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : 5’ - Greetings . Greetings . - Ss answer the questions . Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you eat much candy ? + Do you often eat ice- creams? + How often do you brush your teeth ? + If you have healthy teeth , what should you do ? Remark and lead in new lesson . -Look at the picture and b. New lesson: answer the questions . -Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess : Where are they ? What are they doing ? -Introduce the situation of the lesson , then Listen to the teacher . explain some new words to Ss . 1. Vocabulary: 7’ - Have Ss read new words in chorus and -Read new words in chorus individually. and individually , guess the + Medical check- up ( n ) : Khám sức khỏe (trans) meanings , then copy down. + Medical record ( n ) : Phiếu khám sk (trans ) + Height ( n ) : Chiều cao (trans) + To measure ( v ) : Đo ( trans) + To weigh ( v ) : Cân nặng ( trans) + Temperature ( n ) : nhiệt độ, Sốt. (trans) + To take one’s temperature : Đo nhiệt độ của ai… + Scales ( n ) : Cái cân ( explain ).

(133) + Normal ( adj ) : Bình thường (trans) 2. Structure: Would you open your mouth , please ? Would you + V ?  Checking: Rub out and remember . Have Ss guess the content of the dialogue and order the sentences . -Call on some Ss to give their predictions in front of the class . -Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their order . -Ask them to read the dialogue again and give the answers . Correct and give the correct answers : 1.F 2.D 3. C 4. G 5. E 6. A 7. H 8. B - Ask Ss to write the correct answer in the notebooks. - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. 3. Comprehension questions : -Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1. What were the students of QT school doing ? 2. LN 3. Who was doing the medical check – up ? 4. What did the nurse do ? 5. LN 6. What was Hoa’s temperature? Was it normal? 7. What was her height ? 8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she ? c. Consolidation : - Ask Ss to use the structure: Would you + V ? to make the sentences by playing a game : Noughts and crosses Take Open your Fill in the temperature mouth form Sit down Speak Ah. Get on the scales Wait in the waiting room. Measure your height Give name. Make example : Would you open your mouth , please ? Remark .. 5’ - Play a game : rub out and remember . 11’ - Guess the order of the sentences . - Give the predictions in front of the class . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Read the dialogue and check the predictions . Write the correct answers .. Work in pairs . Practice in front of the class . 8’ Play a game : Answer the questions 2 groups take part in the game .. 3’ Play a game :Noughts and crosses Make sentences with the cues ..

(134) d. Homework: Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook . Prepare part 2, 3.. 2’ - Copy down homework. Week 24. Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Period 67.. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy Lesson 1: a2, 3.a check - up. 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information. + Review the structures ask and answer about the height and weight. * Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health. Male - Female * Grammar : The simple present tense. Structure: How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? b. Skill: Practice reading and make up the dialogue in pairs - Practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are eduducated about how to keep fit and health, and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 6’ ) * Question: Read and translate the dailogue in pairs (2 ps) Choose the best answer(1 ps).

(135) 1. How often do you have a .............check-up? A. medicine B. medical C. hospital 2. Would you................the door? A. open B. opening C. opened 3. What’s my temperatrure, nurse? - Well, It’s 370C. That’s.............. A. high B. normal C. unusual 4. How.......are you? - I’m one meter 50 centimeters......... A. tall B. long C. far * Answers : Answers T: Feetback to ps remember. Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : 5’ Greetings. - Greetings. Have Ss play a game : Slap the board Play a game: Slap the board. Scale Medical record s - Play agame in two teams (2 groups take part in the Medical check Height game. up Norm al. Weigh. Measur e Demonstrate the group which wins the. game. b. New lesson : 1. Listen. Then write the missing words. - Introduce the situation of the lesson.. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words. - Have Ss listen to the tape for the first time. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and find out the words to fill in the blanks. - Ask Ss to exchange the results with the partners. Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class. - Have Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers. - Correct and give the correct answers. Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. How old are you? Hoa: Fourteen. Doctor: And your height is one meter 50 centimeters? Hoa: No. I think I’m shorter. The nurse measured. - Clap the hands. 7’ Listen to the teacher carefully. - Read the dialogue and guess the missing words. - Listen to the tape carefully. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers in front of the class. - Listen to the tape again and check the answers. - Listen and copy down..

(136) me. Doctor: Oh. How tall are you? Hoa: One meter 45 centimeters. Doctor: I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How heavy are you? Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilograms. Doctor: No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms. - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner. - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. 2. Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain some questions : + Which school does he go to? + What is his surname? + How tall is he = What’s his height? + What’s his weight? = How heavy is he? - Ask Ss to work in pairs: One is A , the other is B asking and asnwering the information to complete the medical record . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary. - Ask Ss to complete the form in their notebooks . c. Cosolidation ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? - New words and phrases * Ask for height and weight - How tall/ heavy + be + S ? - S + be + ....meter...cm - S + be + ....kilos T: Feetback to ps remember. d. Homework - Learn the new words and phrases make examples - Practice reading A2 again and translate the dailogue. - Do exercise 3,4 in exbook - Prepare for the new lesson : Unit 11: Keep fit and stay healthy(B1). 5’. Work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Practice the dialogue in front of the class.. 17’ -Listen to the teacher and write down.. -Work in pairs. -Some pairs pratice in front of the class. - Complete the form in the notebooks. 3’ - Retell the content of the lesson individually.. 2’. - Write homework..

(137) Week 24. Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Period 68.. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy Lesson 3: b1. What was wrong with you?. 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and asnwer questios about sickness and further practice in the past simple, question forms and negative forms. + Review the structures “ What’s wrong with you? / What’s the mater with you”. * Vocabulary: - Bad cold - Sick note - Headache - Virus - Stomachache - Flu * Grammar: The simple past tense: question forms and negative forms. Structures: What is/ was wrong with SB? I have/ had a headache. She has / had a bad cold. b. Skill: Practice reading the dialogue in pairs and practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are eduducated about how to keep fit and health, and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 5’ ) * Question: Read the dailogue about your personal information in pairs(2 ps) * Answers : Answers Which class are you in? I’m in class 7.. What is your name?- It’s .... Where do you live? I live at 6..... How tall are you? I’m .. How heavy are you? I’m .. kilos. Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings ..

(138) - Ask Ss some questions about themselves. EX: How tall are you? What’s your weight? How old are you? …………….. - Remark and give marks. b. New lesson 1. Presentation : - Introduce the situation of the lesson the explain some new words and structures : + To have a bad cold : a headache / a virus / flu / a stomachache . + To be sick = to be ill . + Sick note ( n ) : Have Ss play a game 2. Structures : What is / was wrong with SB ? EX: What was wrong with you ? I had a headache. 3. Practice : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions: + Look at balloon 1 : Lan was not there . She was absent . What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan? What was wrong with her? ( look at balloon 2 ) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions . - Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class . - Have Ss listen to the tape and look at the books then check the answers. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions in the books . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers : a) Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she had a bad cold. b) She had a headache . c) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside at recess . d) The doctor said that Lan had a virus .. - Answer T’s questions . - Listen to the teacher and copy down .. 7’ Read new words in chorus and individually, guess meanings then copy down .. 5’. Make sentences : What was wrong with her ? She had a bad cold .. 14’ Look at the pictures and answer the questions.. Read the dialogue in silent to find out the answers. - Give the answers in front of the class. - Listen to the tape and check the answers . - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class..

(139) e) The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note . - Ask Ss to copy down . 4. Production : - Give some cues and ask Ss to practice in pairs . You / a cold . She / toothache . Lan / headache . He / flu . Ba / Stomachache . Make example : S1 : What was wrong with you ? S2: I had a cold . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Remark .. - Copy down . 6’ Work in pairs . Listen .. - Work in pairs . Practice in front of the class.. c. Consolidation ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? - New words and phrases What’s the matter with.....? What’s wrong with........? S + have/has + name of illness T: Feetback to ps remember.. 2’. d. Homework - Learn the new words and phrases make examples - Practice reading B1 again and translate the dailogue. - Do exercise 1,2 at page 71 in workbook - Prepare for the new lesson : Unit 11: Keep fit and stay healthy(B2,3). 1’. - Retell the content of the lesson individually.. - Copy down homework Write homework.. Week 24. Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Period 69.. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy Lesson 4: b2, 3. 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, The students continue to review vocabulary about the common illness, they listen to the tape for specific information..

(140) Flu, stomachache and some new words. The past simple tense. + Ask and answer about the health b. Skill: Practice reading and make up the dialogue in pairs Practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are educated about how to keep fit and health, and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … a.Checking the old lesson( 6’ ) * Question: Read the dailogue and translate B1 in pairs(2 ps) * Answers : Answers: Read/ others comment T: Listen and correct if need Teacher’s activities * Warm up : - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Networks. T 5’. Ss’ activities - Greetings. Play a game : Networks. Common illness 2 groups take part in the game.. Demonstrate the group which wins the game. b. New lesson : 1. Take a survey - Introduce the aim of the exercise. - Ask Ss to work in groups of four and ask them to choose a secretary for their group. - Have Ss use the table B2 to take a survey Eg: Were you absent from school last semester? Did you have a cold? a stomachache ? the flu ? a toothache ? - Ask the secretaries to give the results of their groups. - Combine the result for the whole class. - Ask Ss to answer the questions : What was the most common illness? What was the least common illness? - Remark. 2. Listen. - Introduce the aim of the listening to Ss.. 7’ Listen to the teacher. - Work in groups. - Take a surve.. 5’. Give the results of the groups. Answer the questions. Copy the answer in the notebooks.. 14’ Listen to the teacher..

(141) - Ask Ss to draw the table in the notebooks. - Have Ss predict the days lost through sickness in class 7A last semester. - Call on some Ss to give their predictions - Have Ss listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Play the tape again for Ss to complete the table. - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check their answers. - Correct and give the correct answers : + Cold : 10 + Flu : 43 + Stomachache : 37 + Headache : 5 + Toothache : 17 + Total days lost : 112 c .Consolidation: -Ask Ss to compare the days lost through sickness in class 7A with those in their own class -Ask some Ss to report in front of the class. EX: Last semester in class 7A, cold caused 10 days’ absence but in my class cold caused 7 days’absence……. Remark. ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? - New words and phrases What was the most common illness? What was the least common illness? It’s.... T: Feetback to ps remember. d. Homework : - Write the comparation in the notebooks. - Do exercise 3 at page 71 in workbook. - Prepare part 4,5. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.. Draw the table. - Predict the days lost through sickness. - Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check the prediction. - Listen and complete the table. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answer in front of the class. - Listen to the tape and check the answers. Copy down.. 6’ -Compare the days lost through sickness in class 7A with the own class. -Some Ss report in front of the class.. - Retell the content of the lesson individually.. 2’. -Write homework. - Copy down homework.

(142) Week 25. Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Period 70.. Unit 11: Keep fit, stay healthy Lesson 5: b4,5. 1. The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the symptoms of the common cold and the cues to prevent it. Practice readind skill. * Vocabulary: - Disease - Symptom - Runny nose - Slight fever - To cough - To sneeze - To prevent - To relieve - Cure => to cure - To disappear * Grammar: The simple present tense b. Skill: Practice reading skill and answer the questions Practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are eduducated about how to keep fit and health, and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 6’ ) * Question: ? How many pupils have a cold/ flu/ stomachache/ headache/ toothache? What was the most common illness? What was the least common illness? * Answers : Answers: Cold Flu stomachache headache toothache 10 43 37 It’s......... T: Listen and correct if need Teacher’s activities * Warm up : - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game - Ask Ss to write a disease which they caught last time in a paper sheet. - Have one student go to the board and others guess. - Remark, ask Ss some questions about the. 5 T 5’. 17 Ss’ activities. - Greetings. - Play a game: guessing game. - All class take part in the game..

(143) disease they caught and lead in the new lesson. b. New lesson 1. Pre- reading : - Introduce the situation of the lesson, then explain some new words to Ss. + Disease ( n ) : Bệnh (Trans) + Symptom ( n ) : Triệu chứng (trans) + Runny nose ( n ) : Sổ mũi (explain) + Slight fever ( n ) : Sốt nhẹ (Explain) + To cough ( v ) : Ho (mime) + To sneeze ( v ) : Hắt hơi (mime) + To relieve ( v ) : Làm giảm ( trans) + To prevent ( v ) : Ngăn ngừa (trans) + To disappear ( v ) : Biến mất (trans) + Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Chữa trị (trans) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.. 7’ - Listen to the teacher carefully.. Read new words in chorus and individually, then guess the meanings and copy down.. - Have Ss play a game: rub out and remember 3’ - Play a game. in order to check new words. - Have Ss work in groups discussing the - Work in groups. questions : + Why do people call the cold “common’’? + What are the symptoms of the common cold? - Call some Ss from groups to give their - Give the answers in front of discussion in front of the class. the class. 2. While – reading : 14’ - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the - Look at the books and listen tape then check their discussion. to the tape. - Have Ss read the text in silent. - Read the text in silent. - Call on some Ss to answer the pre- questions. - Answer the questions. - Have some Ss read the text aloud. - Read the text aloud. - Correct their pronunciation. - Have Ss read the text again and find out the - Read the text again and find answers for the questions in the book. out the answers. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and asnwering - Work in pairs. the questions. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class. class. - Correct the mistake and give the correct - Copy down. answers : a) Because every year millions of people catch it. b) They are: a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and sneezing. c) No, there is no cure for the common cold..

(144) d) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold, but they relieve the symptoms. e) We can prevent a cold by eating well, doing exercise, keeping fit and staying healthy. 3. Post – reading : - Ask Ss to write about the common cold. - Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of the class . - Remark. c. Cosolidation ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? - New words and phrases about the common cold ? What’s the symptoms of common cold? - They are runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and sneezing. T: Feetback to ps remember. d. Homework - Learn the new words and phrases make examples - Practice reading B4,5 again and translate the passage B4. - Do exercise B4,5 in exbook - Prepare for the new lesson : Test 45 minutes. 7’ - Write about the common cold. - Read the writing aloud. 2’ - Retell the content of the lesson individually.. 1’ - Write homework. - Copy down homework. Week 25. Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Period 71.. WRITTEN TEST 3 ( 45’) ENGLISH 7. 1. The aims. a. Knowledge. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know their ability to do the test with their knowledge have learnt in unit 9,10 &11. b. Skill. Improve communicative skills ( reading, listening, writing) and language focus , work in individual to complete sentences and a passage. c. Education..

(145) Educate Ss to do own something. 2. Preparation. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, the photos of questions, tape and radio b. Students : Learn the old leson, pens. 3. Procedure. CHỦ ĐỀ Listen Language focus - Pronunciation. NHẬN BIẾT TNKQ TL Q1 2. THÔNG HIỂU TNKQ TL. VẬN DỤNG TNKQ TL. TỔNG 5 2. Q2. 11 1. - Tenses - Prepositions - Vocab Read. Q3. Q4 1.5. 1. 3.5. Q5. 6 2.5. Write. 2.5 Q6. 4 2. Tổng. 2Q. 1Q 3. 2Q 1.5. 1Q 3.5. 2 25. 2. 10. * Organization: Check numbers of students Question1: Listen to the conversation at the doctor’s and fill in the following form. (2 point) MEDICAL RECORD NAME:(1)................................................................ AGE: (2)................................................................... WEGHT( 3).............................................................. HEIGHT(4)............................................................... TEMPERATURE(5)................................................ Question 2. Pronunciation: (1,0 point) Group into sound columns according to final "ED": raised, rowed, visited, sailed, looked, watched, opened, listened, washed, stopped /t/ /d/ /id/. Question 3: Fill the word in the blank. Use the word to help you. ( 1,5 point) matter toothache of scared brush stay up a. I ...............................my teeth everyday. b. You don’t look very well. What’s the .....................with you,Minh? c. His parents are very busy, so he has to take care......................himself. d. He is having a......................................., so he is going to the dentist today..

(146) e. You shouldn’t ......................late. You should go to bed early. f. Were you ...............................when you went to the dentist? Question 4: Use the correct form of the verbs(1 point). a. Yesterday, my father( go).........................to SONLA City. b. What...................you( buy)......................for your family? c. The dentist(fill).................................a cavity in his tooth yesterday. d. What was wrong with you? - I ( have) .......................a bad cold. Question 5: Read the passage and answer the questions (2,5 points) Hoa was born in Hue, but now she is living in Ha Noi with her aunt and uncle. She went to Ha Noi 2 years ago. Now she is studying at Quang Trung school. Yesterday was her thirteenth birthday. She had a small party with her friends. They ate a lot of food and fruits and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She called a doctor. The doctor arrived and gave Hoa some medicine. She took the medicine and went to bed. Today Hoa feels better. She remembers the things she ate in the party. She tells her friends not to eat a lot of things. 1. Where was Hoa born? ..................................................................................................... 2. When did she go to Ha Noi? ........................................................................................ 3. Who is she living with? .................................................................................................... 4. What did she do yesterday? ....................................................................................... 5.What was the matter with Hoa yesterday evening? ...................................................................................... 6. How does she feel today? ................................................................................................. Quetion 6: Rearrange these sentences(2 points) a. The students of/ check-up/ Quang Trung/ having/ are/ a medical/ School. ............................................................................................ b. How/ do/ often/ you/ brush/ your teeth? ............................................................................................ c. How/ are/ you/ tall?- meter/ one/ forty- five/ centimeters/ am/ I. ............................................................................................ d. What/ common illness/ was/ the most? - It/ was/ flu/ the. ............................................................................................. Week 25. Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Period 72.. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011.

(147) A TEST – CORRECTION PERIOD 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know their ability to check the test compare with the the keys. Review all the knowledge which they’ve done in the test. b.Skills: Pupils train reading and speaking. c. Education: Making pupils more carefully. 2. Prepare. *. Teacher: Teaching plan. *. Pupils : Textbook, notebook, review all the knowledge in unit 9 & unit 11. 3.Procedure a.Check the old lesson( No) b. New lesson - Giáo viên trả bài,đưa ra đáp án và biểu điểm chi tiết. T 5’. 7’. Teacher’s activities Greet and give the game Have ss play game in group , find the mistakes Check and remark. Contents I. Warm up : Find the mistakes in these sentences : 1. Hoa is absent from class yesterday 2. My mother writed sick note for me. 3. My sister is 45 kilo. II. Error Analysis:. Here are some common mistakes How many mistakes * In question 1 ( Listen ) ……………………………………………………………… are there ? How do we correct ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… them ? ……………………………………………………………… Lead in the lesson * In question 2 (pronunciation ) ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… * In question 3 ( vocabulary ) Teacher lists a list ……………………………………………………………… of sentences with ……………………………………………………………… the common ……………………………………………………………… mistakes in four ……………………………………………………………… questions.( The * in question 4 ( tenses ) mistakes are written ……………………………………………………………… on the extra board ……………………………………………………………… or poster ) ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… * in question 5 ( Reading ) ……………………………………………………………….

(148) 23'. 7’. ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… Have ss find the * in question 6 ( Writing) mistakes and ……………………………………………………………… correct them in ……………………………………………………………… group ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… Go around and help III. Student – student Correction : ( pair work or group them to correct work ) Have ss give their corrections and 1. What mistake is it ? check Now correct with a pencil. Don’t overwrite the mistake Give the key for common mistakes IV. Consolidation : Summary some basic mistakes and Correct mistake again . ( hand out about 10 sentences for show them how to correcting the common mistakes ) correct . KEY Have them take Question1: 2đ ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,4 đ). note MEDICAL RECORD NAME:(1) Tony Addison AGE: (2) 14 WEGHT( 3) 40 kg HEIGHT(4) 1m55 TEMPERATURE(5) 380 C Question 2 (pronunciation ) ( Mỗi từ đúng 0,1 đ) Group into sound columns according to final "ED": /t/: raised, looked, watched, washed, stopped /d/ : rowed,opened,listened,sailed /id/: visited Question 3: 1,5 ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,25 đ ) a, brush b, matter c, of e, stay up f. scared Question 4: 1 đ ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,25 đ ) a. went b, did/ buy c. filled Question 4: 2,5 đ ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,5 đ). 1. Hoa was born in Hue. 2. She went to Ha Noi 2 years ago. 3. She is living with her uncle and aunt. Give the homework 4. She had a small party with her friends 5. Hoa had a stomachache. 6. Today Hoa feels better. Question 5: 2 đ ( Mỗi ý đúng 0,5 đ).. d, toothache d. had.

(149) a. The student of Quang Trung school are having a medical check-up. b. How often do you brush your teeth? c. How tall are you?- I am one meter forty- five centimeters. d. What was the most common illness? - It was the flu. 3’. c. Home work - Read over the test again and correct the last mistakes yourslves at home - Prepare for unit 12 ( A 1,2 ). Tapescript: A: Come in, please. B: Good morning. A: now let me check some personal information first. What’s your name? B: My full name is Tony Addison. That’s T-O-N-Y A double D- I- S- O-N A: Tony Addison, good. How old are you? B: I’m fourteen. A: Now I need to know your weight and your height......Could you stand here please? your weight is 40 kilos, and you are one meter 55 centimeters tall. you are little thin. Now I need to take your temperature. Oh, It’s 380C. It’s a little clever.. Week 26 Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Period 73.. Unit 12: Let’s eat ! Lesson 1: A1,2. What shall we eat? 1. The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the details and practice food vocabulary. Ss will be able to use the structures : I don’t like …..either , I like ……too / neither do I , So do I to express references . II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Spinach - Durian - Cucumber - Papaya - Pineapple - Ripe -To smell.

(150) 2. 2.Grammar : - The simple present tense. * The structure: * I’d like……. * So do I / I do , too * Neither do I / I don’t , either . 2- I like …..too / So do I . - I don’t like ……either / Neither do I . b. Skill: Practice reading skill and answer the questions. Practice speaking skill - Practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are eduducated about how to eat healthy and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a. Checking the old lesson( No ) Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : - Greetings. 1’ - Greetings. -Have Ss play a game: Kim’s game. 5’ Play a game. ( Use the pictures or words written on the board of : fish , chicken , beef , milk , bananas, apples , carrots , oranges ) -Call the students to go to the board and write -Go to the board and write. again. Remark and lead in the new lesson. b. New lesson : -Ask Ss some questions such as : 7’ Answer T’s questions. + Do you usually go to the market? + Who do you often go to the market with? + What do you often see / buy at the market? ……………….. 1. Listen and repeat. - Introduce the situation of the lesson to Ss and 5’ Listen to the teacher and ask Ss to guess what Hoa and her aunt bought at guess what they bought. the market. -Have Ss look at the pictures and listen to the Look at the pictures and listen tape. to the tape. -Ask Ss to look at the book and read after the -Read after the tape. tape. -Explain some new words and structures to Ss. 14’ Listen and write. + Spinach ( n ) : Rau chân vịt (trans) + Cucumber ( n ) : Dưa chuột (Realia- Pic) + Papaya ( n ) : Đu đủ (pic-Realia) -Read new words in chorus + Pineapple ( n ) : Quả dứa (Pic- realia) and individually, guess + Durian ( n ) : Quả sầu riêng (pic) meanings and copy down. + Ripe ( adj ) : chín ( trans).

(151) + To smell ( v ) : ngửi thấy / có mùi ( trans) + Mango(es) (n) xoài (pic) + Display(v) trưng bày,bày bán. (trans) + Corn(n) ngô, bắp. (pic) + Selection(n) sự lựa chọn (trans) + Select (v) * Explain some sentences of Hoa and her aunt in the dialogues. *Structures : + I like spinach and cucumbers.  So do I / I do, too. + I don’t like pork.  Neither do I. / I don’t, either. - Have Ss played a game: What and where. - Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs. -Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to read the dialogues again to find out the answer in the book. Have Ss play a game : * Lucky numbers 1) What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market? 2) LN. 3) Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt? 4) LN. 5) What meat would they like for dinner? 6) What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s aunt? 7) LN 8) What fruit did they buy? 9) Why didn’t they buy a papaya? 10) LN * Demonstrate the group which wins the game. -Ask Ss to write the answer in the notebook 2. Model sentences : S1: I don’t like pork . S2: Neither do I / I don’t either . S1: I like spinach and cucumbers . S2: So do I / I do , too. ( So and too are used in the formative sentences . Neither and either are used in the negative sentences .) EX: S1: I am a student . S2: So am I / I am , too .. Make sentences as models.. Play a game. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class. -Read the dialogues again to find the answer. 8’ -Play a game in 3 groups. Take the numbers and answer the questions.. -Write the answers in the notebook. 5' Listen to the teacher . Copy down ..

(152) S1: I like beef . S2: I do , too . / So do I . S1: She isn’t a doctor . S2: I am not , either . / Neither am I . S1: I don’t like chicken . S2: I don’t , either / Neither do I . ( Not either = Neither ) 3. Practice : - Give some pictures or given words to Ss to practice . + Carrots . X + Beef V + Papaya V + Cabbage X + Fish X + Chicken V - Have Ss work in pairs using the structures they have just learnt and given words . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Have Ss practice in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . 4. Production : Have Ss take a survey . Make example : S1: I like durians . Do you like them ? S2: Yes , I like them , too / So do I . - Call on Ss to give the results . - Remark . c. Consolidation -Have Ss talk about the food they like and dislike. -Ask Ss to work in group of four making real conversations about shopping. -Call on some groups to practice in front of the class. - Remark and give marks. d. Homework : -Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. - Learn by heart the structures by making 3. 8' Practicing using given words. Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. S1: I don’t like carrots. S2: Neither do I I don’t , either S1: I like beef . S2: So do I I do , too. - Write down . - Practice in pairs (free) - Practice in front of the class.. 3’. - Take a survey . - Listen . Practice in groups . -Give the results .. 2’ Talk about the food. -Work in groups making conversations. -Practice in front of the class. - Retell the content of the lesson individually. 2' -Write homework. - Copy down homework..

(153) sentences with each. - Do exercise 1,2,3at page 74 in workbook. - Prepare part A 3, 4.. Week 26 Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Period 74.. Unit 12: Let’s eat ! Lesson 3: A3, 4. What shall we eat? 1. The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to reading the text to understand how to make a meal by making some dishes .They can consolidation the past simple tense and regular verbs and write what they ate and drank . * Vocabulary :To slice / Bowl /To boil / To heat / To stir- fry / Soy sauce /Chopsticks / Spoon * Grammar : The past simple tense b. Skill: Practice reading and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are educated about how to eat healthy and make a meal and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 5’) * Questions: ? Make a dailogue to talk about the food and drink with too/so/ either/ neither? * Answers : A: I like chicken B: Yes, I’d like chicken, too/ so do I/...... Teacher’s activities * Warm up : - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions : EX: Do you like chicken?/ Beef ? Do you know how to prepare a meal?  Lead in the new lesson. b. New activities : 1. Read, then answer the questions . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer. T 1’ 5’. Ss’ activities - Greetings. Answer T’s questions.. 7’ Look at the pictures and answer.

(154) the question: What is she doing ? - Call on some Ss to give the answer. - Introduce the situation and explain some new words to Ss. + To slice ( v ) : Thái (mime) + To boil ( v ) : Luộc (trans) + To heat ( v ) : đun nóng (trans) + To stir – fry ( v ) : Xào (trans) + Bowl ( n ) : Cái bát (realia) + Chopsticks ( n ) : Đũa (realia) + Soy sauce ( n ) : Xì dầu (realia) + Spoon ( n ) : Thìa (realia) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Correct their pronunciation. - Have Ss play a game: Rub out and remember in order to check new words . - Have Ss guess the order of the statements : 5’ a) First , she sliced the beef . b) Then she cooked some rice and boiled some spinach. c) Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner . d) Next, she sliced some green pepers and onions . e) And then she set the table and the family sat down to eat . f) After that she stir- fried the beef and vegetables . g) Finally , she sliced the cucumbers and made cucumber salad . - Ask Ss to work in groups ordering the sentences . - Call on some groups to give their prediction - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the order . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. F 6. G 7. E - Have Ss read the text in silent . 10’ - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Ask Ss to work in groups to write the menu - Call on some groups to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : + Cucumber salad with onions . + Boiled spinach + Stir- fried beef with green pepers and onions. the question. -Listen to the teacher.. Read new words in chorus and individually, guess the meanings, then copy down.. Play a game. - Do exercise. Work in groups. -Give the predictions.. -Listen to the tape and check the order.. - Read the text in silent. - Read the text aloud. - Work in groups. - Give the answers. - Write down..

(155) + Rice - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Have Ss read the text again then complete the sentences by adding the missing verbs . - Have Ss exchange the results with their partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : 1. Slice 2. slice 3. heat 4. stir- fry 5. add 6. cook 7. add - Ask Ss to match the completed sentences with the pictures . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and ask Ss to write down . 1. C 2. F 3. A 4. D 5. B 6. E 7. G 2. Write . What did you eat and drink yesterday ? - Ask some Ss the questions : what did you eat and drink yesterday ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . c. Consolidation : - Have Ss write a short paragraph to tell what they ate and drank yesterday . - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class . - Remark . d. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. - Do exercise 5 at page 76 in workbook. - Prepare B1 .. Week 26. - Read the text again and complete the sentences. - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers . - Write down . - Match the sentences with the pictures . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answer . - Write down . 7’ - Asnwer the question . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . 3’ - Write a short paragraph. - Read the writing in front of the class . - Retell the content of the lesson individually. 2’ - Write homework. - Copy down homework..

(156) Planning date: ...... / 02/ 2011 Period 75.. Teaching date: ...... / 02 / 2011 ...... / 02 / 2011. Unit 12: Let’s eat ! Lesson 4: B1.Our Food. 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know why Ba had to go to the doctor’s and the reason which caused Ba’s stomachache. The structures: - It must be ………….. - It was probably ……… - Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt . *The past simple tense and present simple tense. b. Skill: Practice reading and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are educated about how to eat healthy and make a meal and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 15’) * Questions: Read. then answer the questions Yesterday Alice and Tim went shopping in Oxford Street. Tim was also interested in a Motor Show at Earls Court, a big exhibition hall in London. So he arranged to meet Alice for lunch at a restaurant in Soho. He left for the show and Alice walked round the big stores to buy some clothes, hats and shoes. After going in and out many stores, she bought the things she needed. Alice felt very tired and hungry. She dicided to go to Soho. When she arrived, Tim was there already.They had lunch and went home in the afternoon. 1. When did Alice and Tim go shopping? 2. Where did they eat lunch? 3. What did Alice buy? 4. How did Alice feel ater going many stores? 5. Did they have lunch and go home in the evening? * Answers : 1. Yesterday Alice and Tim went shopping.(2ps) 2. At a restaurant in Soho.(2ps) 3. Alice bought some clothes, hats and shoes ........(2ps) 4. Alice felt very tired and hungry.(2ps) 5. No, they didn’t . They had lunch and went home in the afternoon.(2ps) Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities b. New lesson : - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the 7’ - Look at the picture carefully . question: Where is Ba ? What is the matter with him ? - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . - Give the predictions ..

(157) - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Call on some Ss to give the correct answers + Ba is at the doctor’s . + He has an awful stomachache . - Explain some structures to Ss . + It must be something you ate . + It was probably the spinach . + That dirt can make you sick . + These medicine will make you feel better. - Have Ss make sentences with the structures. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation.  Comprehension questions : - Have Ss play a game: Lucky numbers. 1. What did Ba eat last night? 2. Who washed the spinach? 3.LN 4. Why did Ba go to the doctor? 5. Did his parents eat spinach? 6.LN 7. What made him sick? 8. What did the doctor give him? - Remark and state the group which wins the game.  Now complete the story. - Ask Ss to complete the story based on the dialogue above. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class. *Correct and give answer key : Ba went to the doctor because he was sick. The doctor asked Ba some questions. Ba said he had some spinach last night. The doctor said he must wash the spinach more carefully/well. Vegetables can be dirty. The dirt can make people sick. She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make him feel better. - Call on some Ss to read the story in front of the class. 5’. - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Give the answers . - Listen to the teacher and copy down. - Make sentences using the structures.. - Work in pairs. -Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class. 14’ -Play a game in 3 groups take part in the game . - Clap hands .. - Complete the story . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the result . - Copy down .. - Read the story aloud . - Listen carefully ..

(158) c. Consolidation : - Repeat the content of the lesson and the structures.. 2’. d. Homework : - Learn by heart the structures by making 3 sentences with each - Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in workbook. - Prepare part B2,3.. 2’. - Retell the content of the lesson individually. -Write homework. - Copy down homework.. Week 27. Planning date: 25 / 02/ 2011. Teaching date: 7B 28 / 02 / 2011 7A ..... / 03 / 2011. Period 76.. Unit 12: Let’s. eat !. Lesson 5: B2,3 Our food 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a balanced diet . Listen to a text for details and further practice in food vocabulary . They continue to practice listening skill .They will know what they should do to have a healthy lifestyle. 1. Vocabulary : - Balanced diet /- Energy / - To affect - Body- building food / - Moderate - Dairy product / - Amount / - Cereals / - Lifestyle / - Plenty of ... 2. Grammar : Review the food vocabulary . The past simple tense b. Skill: Practice reading skill to answer the questions and writing skill..

(159) c. Education: Ss are educated about how to choose and balance healthy food and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, chalk, picture, projector, tape.... * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a. Checking the old lesson (in lesson) Teacher’s activities *Warm up : - Greetings . - Play a game: crossword puzzle. BALANCED. b) New lesson : - Introduce the situation : “ Food plays an important part in our life . It gives us the main energy for body development . thus, a balanced diet is especially important . In our today’s lesson , we will learn about the definition of a balanced diet and useful guidelines about food” -Explain some new words and phrases to Ss. 1. New words. + Balanced diet ( n ) : Chế độ ăn hợp lí ( Trans) + To affect ( v ) : ảnh hưởng( Trans) + Moderate ( adj ) => Moderation ( n ) + Amount ( n ) : Số lượng( quanlity) + Energy ( n ) : Năng lượng( trans) + Body- building food ( n ) : Thức ăn giúp phát triển cơ thể. + Dairy product ( n ) : Thực phẩm bơ sữa (explain) + Cereals ( n ) : Ngũ cốc (trans) + Lifestyle ( n ) : Lối sống (trans) + Fatty food ( n ) : Thức ăn giàu chất béo (trans) -Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember . T explains the food pyramid T ask some questions: What is your favorite food? What do you usually have for breakfast/lunch/dinner? Do you think your diet is balanced? - Ask Ss to do an exercise : T or F prediction. T 5’. Ss’ activities - Greetings . - Play a game .. 2’ Listen to the teacher .. Listen and write . 7' Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings , then copy down .. Play a game . 5’ - Listen to the teacher. - Answer the questions.. 5' - Do exercise ..

(160) What does a balanced diet mean? 1) Eat a lot of meat . 2) Eat a little fruit and vegetables . 3) Eat a moderate amount of sugar . 4) Eat a little fatty food . 5) Eat plenty of food you like . - Have Ss discuss in groups .Call on Ss to give their discussion . - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer: 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 2. Listen and read. - Let Ss listen to the tape - Call on 3 or 4 students to read the passage aloud . 3. Answer the questions. - Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .. Work in groups . - Give their prediction. - Look at the book , listen to the tape and check the prediction . -Give the answers . 6' - Listen to the tape. - Some Ss read the passage aloud . 3' - Read the passage again to find out the answers . - Work in groups . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class.. - Correct and give the answer key : 2' -Write the answers in the a) Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you notebooks . energy . b) A balanced diet is not enough all people need exercise to keep a healthy life . c) Ss’ Answers . How should we eat? 3’ Answer the question. talk about “ a balanced diet” c. Consolidation : 6' - Ask Ss to do an exercise : Read and complete - Do exercise the summary We know that the food we eat (1) …………… our whole life, so we remember to (2)……….. sensibly. We should have a balanced (3) …………. . What does a “balanced diet” mean? It means you eat a (4) ……………. of food without too much of anything. (5) ………………. is very important. Eat the food you enjoy, (6) …………don’t have too much. This will have you (7) …………….. fit and healthy. - Work in pairs ..

(161) - Have Ss work in pairs . - Give the discussion in front - Call on some Ss to give their dicussion in front of the class . of the class . 1’ d. Homework : Write homework . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write a menu for yourself and your family B3 . - Practice reading B2 again and translate the passage B2. - Do exercise B2 in exbook - Prepare for the new lesson : unit 12( B4,5). Week 27. Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Period 77.. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03 / 2011. Unit 12: Let’s. eat !. Lesson 5: B4, 5 Our food 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the importance of food to heathy of people and know to eat suitably and sensibly. + Lýten to a passage about what Lan, Ba, Nga, and Hoa ate and drank and train reading the poeam about what we should do to keep fit and stay healthy. b. Skill: Practice reading, listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss are educated about how to take care of themselves, keep fit and stay healthy and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, chalk, picture, radio, tape. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 6’) * Questions: Read the reading and answer the questions a,b,c (2pupils) * Answers : - Read and answer a, Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy. b. A balanced diet alone is not enough, all people need exercise to keep a healthy life. c. Yes, I think my balanced diet/.. b. New lesson * Warm up:(1’).

(162) Introduce: The food is very important for our whole life. Today we will learn how to eat suitable food. Teacher’s activities T Pupils’s activities - Introduce the requirement B3 8' 3, Write a menu for yourself ? Look at B3 and guide ps to write a menu - Listen to teacher - introduce 3 products + body- building: bread, fish, milk, + body- building chicken + energy- giving + energy- giving: honey, candy, + protective cake. ? Look at the picture name the food for + protective(a) có tính phòng ngừa: each meal(GW)? pineapple, spinach ? Call some ps to answer in the class and correct if need? - GW ? Now write a menu for yourself and your family? - Answer/ comment - Go around and helf if need - Write ex: Brekfast: milk, bread ex: Lunch: chicken, spinach, pineapple. ex: dinner: fruits, beef, cabbage.... ? Look at the picture and name the foods 20' 4. Listen and write the letter of in the pictures? what they ate and drank - Answer: a. rice b. noodle c. fish ? What is your favorite food? d. vegetable e. fruits f. beef ? What do you always have for breakfast/ g. juice/ orange juice h. water lunch/ dinner? - Answer ? What did you eat/ drink for lunch yesterday? ? Listen to a passage talking about what Lan/ Hoa/ ba...ate..? - Play the tape 3 times - Listen and do the exercise ? Compare the answer with apartner? - Compare - Ask ps to give their answers - Answer - Let ps listen to the last time and check, - Coment and correct if need correct if need and give the right answer. - Copy Lan: b, d, f, g. Ba: c, a, e, h. Nga: a, d, g. Hoa: b, e, g. ? Work in pair ask and answer about what - Pair work Hoa/Ba...ate or drank yesterday? - Call some pair to ask & answer in class - Pair work/ comment and correct if need - Introduce the requirement B5.

(163) 6' - Guide ps to read the poem - Turn on the tape ask ps to listen and repeat - Call 3 ps to raed and correct their mistake if have. c. Consolidation 2' ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? T: Feetback to ps remember. d. Homework 2' - Learn the new words and phrases and give examples. - Practice reading B5 again and give the questions and answer them in B4. - Do exercise B3,4,5 in exbook - Prepare for the new lesson : Language focus. 5*. Play with words - Listen - Listen and repeat the poem - Practice reading. Ss: Repeat new words and phrases about the food and drink Write homework. Week 27. Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03 / 2011. Period 78.. Language Focus 4 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt, they will use them and apply to do exercises well. - The simple past tense . - Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much . - Too / either / neither / so . - Imperatives . b. Skill: Practice reading , listening, speaking and writing with words and sentences. c. Education: Ss are eduducated to make formal sentences, know to review the old knowledge, practice well and like learning English. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, paper board. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a. Checking the old lesson( No).

(164) b. New lesson * Warm up( 1’) ? Give an example with past simple tense? P: Answer Introduce: In the lesson today,We will review the knowledge about the present simple tense Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities *Warm up : Greetings . 1’ Greetings . Ask Ss some questions such as : 4’ - Answer T’s questions . + What did you do yesterday ? + Did you watch TV last night ? + What did you do during last summer vacation ?........ Remark and lead in new lesson . * Consolidation and practice : 37’ 1)Past simple tense : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book - Look at the pictures and answer and answer what they are doing . what they are doing . - Call on some Ss to answer the questions - Answer the questions . in front of the class . a) Watch TV . b) Eat at a restaurant . c) Go to the movie theatre . d) Read books . e) Play soccer . - Have Ss answer the questions , using the - Work in pairs . pictures . - Make example : a) S1: Did you do your homework last night ? S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV . -Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of - Practice in front of the class . the class . - Correct and give the correct answers . Write down . b) Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ? No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant . c) Did you go to school yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre . d) Did you watch a video on the weekend ? No, I didn’t . I read books . e) Did you play basketball yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I played soccer . Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . 2)Indefinite quantifiers : - Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers - Repeat the indefinite quantifiers.

(165) and the use . - Ask them to do exercise 2 .  Write the correct expression . - Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : + A little coffee . + A lot of salt . + A lot of tea . + Too much water . + A little sugar -Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .  Complete the dialogues : Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ./Remark . 3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither . Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither . - Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front the class . - Have Ss play a game : Noughts and Crosses . Mangoes Bananas Papaya v x Corn Spinach potatos Fish Chịken beef - Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the notebooks. EX: S1: I like mangoes . S2: So do I / I do , too . S1: I don’t like bananas . S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I . 5) Imperatives : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - Explain some new words : + To Peel ( v ) /+ To mix ( v ) /+ Vinegar ( n ) - Call on some Ss to give their result in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : a) peel / e) Add/ b) Wash / f) Stir d) Slice / g) Wait / c) Mix c. Cosolidation. and the use. Do exercise . Write the correct expression . Give the answer .. Write down in the notebooks . - Look at the pictures and complete the dialogues . Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Repeat the use of too, either , so and neither . - Practice the dialogues in pairs . - Practice in front of the class Play a game . 2 groups take part in the game .. Make sentences with the words , using too, so , either and neither .. Write down . - Look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - Listen and write down - Give the answer . Write down in the notebooks .. 1'.

(166) ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? T: Feetback to ps remember. d. Homework - Learn the strucures and all the verbs( in present and in the past) and make examples. - Redo all the exercises in language forcus 4 - Do exercises in the test youself 4 in workbook - Prepare for the new lesson A1- unit 13. P: + Vocabulary about health, pesonanl hygine, the food an drink + The present, past, future simple tense + Compare with noun 1’ Listen carefully . Write homework .. Week 28 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03 / 2011. Period 79.. Unit 13: ACTIVITIES Lesson 1: A1. 1. The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the USA like best and know the names of some sports. They will know how to change from adjectives to adverbs. *Vocabulary : - Skate boarding - Roller- skating - Roller – blading - Baseball - Surprisingly - Surprising result . - To win the prize: đoạt giải - Competition (n) Cuộc đua, cuộc thi - Prize - Participant: (n)Người tham dự *Grammar : Review the simple past tense and simple present tense . b. Skill: Practice reading skill and answer the questions - Practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss love sports and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( No ) Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities.

(167) *Warm up :- Greetings . 5’ - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : Answer T’s questions . + Do you like playing sports ? + What sport do you play ? + When do you play …….? + Who do you often play with ? + What do you think about ………? ………… -Remark and lead in new lesson . b. New lesson : Introduce: Today we know some words of sports 1' which Amarican students often play in the freetime. 1) Listen and read . Then answer the questions. - Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss to Listen to the teacher , look look at the pictures then answer the questions : at the pictures and answer What are they doing ? the question . - Explain some new words : 7’ + Skate boarding ( n ) :trượt ván (trans) Listen and write down . + Roller- skating ( n ) :Trượt patanh -Read new words in chorus (loại giày có bánh ở 4 góc) and individually , guess + Roller- blading ( n ) :Trượt patanh meaning then copy down . ( loại giày có bánh xe dọc ở dưới đế giày) + Baseball ( n ) :bóng chày ( explain) + Surprising result ( n ) : Kết quả đáng ngạc nhiên + Surprisingly ( adv ) :Ngạc nhiên - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . Play a game - Have Ss discuss in groups about the question : 28’ Work in groups . What sports do you think are the most popular in the USA ? - Call on some groups to give their prediction . Give the prediction . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape - Look at the books , listen then check their prediction . to the tape and check the Call on some Ss to give the answers . prediction . - Give the answers . Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - Read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Read the text aloud . Have Ss answer the question : - Answer the questions . What is the most popular sport in the USA ? Which sport is at 11th position ? - Work in pairs . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the - Practice in front of the questions . class . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ..

(168) c. Consolidation: ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? T: Feetback to ps remember.. 2’. d. Homework : -Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. -Write what sports you like best . -Do exercise 1,2 in workbook .Prepare part A2,3. 2’. - New words and phrases about the sports - Listen and remember Write homework. Week 28 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03 / 2011. Period 80.. Unit 13: ACTIVITIES Lesson 2: A2,3 1.The aims. a. Knowledge: After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into adverbs and use adverbs of manner.They will continue to talk about sports . 1.Vocabulary : - Skillful => Skillfully - Safe => safely - Cyclist - To cycle - To be aware of - Lifeguard - Strict - To obey 2.Grammar : Structure : Adjectivie + ly => adverb b. Skill: Practice reading skill,practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss love sports and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture..

(169) * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson( 4’) * Question: ? Talk about 10 names of sports which Amarican students often play in the freetime. * Answers - Roller- blading/Roller- skating/ basebal/ .... Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up : Greetings . Have Ss play a game : Networks. T 1’. Ss’ activities - Greetings .. 6’. - Play a game : Networks. Most popular sports in the USA Have Ss work in groups . Discuss in groups . - Call on Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and - Go to the board and write write . - Remark and state the group which wins the game . b. New lesson: 2*) Take a class survey 10’ - Ask ps to work in pairs ask and answer the Work in groups . questions ( Hang the paperboard) -Practice in front of the 1. Which sports do you like best? class . 2. What is your favorite sport? -Write the number of the 3. Do you like playing tennis/ swimming? students who like each 4. Why do you like this sport? sport best . - Call some pairs to practice in class and correct if -Answer the question . need. -Have Ss work in groups ? Do students in Vietnam like the sports? asking their classmates ? Which sport(s) do they like best? what sport they like most . ? Ask your classmates which sports do they like Some groups to practice in best? write a quantily( or number) and order them? front of the class . -Ask Ss to answer the - It/ They + is/ are...... question : What sport is the - athletics(n) môn điền kinh most popular in the class ? - Take a survey - Answer - Answer - Help if need and give the right answers 3) Listen . Then practice with a partner . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of the pictures . - Explain some new words to Ss .. 20’ Listen to the teacher Listen and write down ..

(170) + Good ( adj ) => well ( adv ) + Skillful ( adj ) => Skillfully ( adv ) : điêu luyện, có kĩ thuật. + Safe ( adj ) => Safely ( adv ) 1 cách an toàn. + Cyclist ( n ) : người đi xe đạp. + To cycle ( v ) = To ride a bike - Introduce how to change adjectives into adverbs and the use of Adj and Adv : Adjective + ly => adverb EX : Slow => Slowly Bad => badly Quick => quickly + He’s a good soccer player  He plays soccer well + She’s a quick runner  She runs quickly .  Adjectives often go with To Be  Adverbs often go with ordinary verbs . - Ask Ss to make sentences using adjectives and adverbs . - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape .. Read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .. Listen to the teacher carefully .. - Make sentences with the adjectives and adverbs . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Read then work in group and answer - Pairwork - Practice in class and correct if need. - Have Ss work in pairs reading the text . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . c. Consolidation: - Repeat the way to change adjective to adverb . - Give some cues and ask Ss to make sentences . + Slow / slowly / swimmer + Quick / quickly / runner + Bad / badly / volleyball *Make example : + She’s a slow runner. =>She runs slowly . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . -Correct the mistakes . d. Homework : -Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them . -Do exercise 3,4 at page 83 in workbook . Prepare part A4,5 .. 2’ - Listen . - Make sentences with the cues .. -Practice in front of the class . 2’ Write homework..

(171) Week 28 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03/ 2011. Period 81.. Unit 13: ACTIVITIES Lesson 2: A4,5 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know to use adverbs of manner and change sentences use adjectives into adverbs and know the usefull of sport: walking. b. Skill: Practice reading skill and answer the questions, practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss love sports and like learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson(4’) * Question: Say to make adv from adj and give examples * Answers: Adj + ly - Adv (slow - slowly; quick- quikly....) (However, there are some special adj) Teacher’s activities * Warm up : Greetings . - Ask Ss to answer the questions 1. Which sports do you like best? 2. What is your favorite sport? 3. Do you like jogging/ swimming? 4. Why do you like this sport? . b. New lesson : 4) Read . Then answer the questions . - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question: what kind of sports in the picture ?. T 1’ 5’. Ss’ activities - Greetings . Discuss in pairs . - Answer in front of class.. 20’ - Look at the picture and answer the question ..

(172) What is WFF? WTS? Call on some Ss to answer . Ask Ss to read the text and check the answer. * Explain some new words to Ss. + To win ( v ) => won /+ Prize ( n ) : + Participant ( n ) : A person who take part in the game . - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .. - Answer the question. - Read the text . Listen and write down .. Read new words in chorus and individually. - Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - Read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. - Read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation . - Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the Work in pairs . questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class . class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers - Copy down. . a) He takes part in WFF. b) His school team won the first prize , they were so happy and wanted to keep this activity . c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday morning , and the other is walk- to – school day d) It’s 5 km from school to the beach . e) Wednesday is the WTS day . f) Members living near school often take part in the WTS day. -Ask Ss to copy down . 5) Write . Change the adjectives in brackets to 10' adverbs . - Ask Ss to complete the passage with the correct - Complete the passage adverbs in brackets . with the correct adverbs . - Explain some new words to Ss . + To be aware of: ko nhận thấy sự nguy hiểm - Listen and write down. + Lifeguard ( n ) người cứu hộ + Strict ( adj ) => Strictly : 1cách nghiêm khắc. + To obey ( v ) vâng lời nghe lời. -Have Ss exchange the result with the partner - Exchange the result with -Call on 2=> 3 Ss to give the results in front of the the partner . class . -Correct and give the correct answers -Give the results in front of -Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . the class . -Write down . c.Consolidation:. 2’.

(173) ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? T: Feetback to ps remember.. d. Homework - Learn the new words and phrases make examples with the new words - Practice reading A4 again and translate the passage A4 into Vietnamese. - Do exercise A4,5 in exbook - Prepare for the new lesson : unit 13( B1,2). 2’. - New words and phrases about the sports, know to use adverbs of manner and change sentences use adjectives into adverbs and know the usefull of sport: walking. Write homework.. Week 29 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03/ 2011. Period 82.. Unit 13: ACTIVITIES Lesson 3: B1,2 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review how to use model verbs: must, have to, ought to...through the dailogue about the tittle of sport. Ss continue to practice in making , accepting and refusing an invitation , using modal verbs . * Vocabulary : - Ought to /should/Must / Spare(adj) Dư thừa, để dành / Spare part: Phụ tùng thay thế. -Ocean(n) Đại Dương / Opportunity(tạo) cơ hội. * Grammar : Making an invitation : Would you like to + V ………….?  Yes , let’s / I’d like to / I’d love to . / That’s a good idea . Sorry / That’s too bad . b. Skill: Practice reading skill and answer the questions, practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss love sports and like learning E.L and know more usefull of playing sports. 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure.

(174) a.Checking the old lesson(5’) * Question: Read the text and answer the questions a to e? * Answers: a, He takes part in walking for fun (WFF). b, The writer’s school team won the first prize, they were so happy and wanted to keep the activities. c. one activity a 5 km walk to the beach on sunday morning and the other is wlk to schooh day. d. It’s 5 kms from school to beach. e. Wednesday is WTS day. f. Members livings near school often take part in the WTS day. Teacher’s activities *Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Find someone Who . Find someone who………… Name. T 1’. Ss’ activities - Greetings . - Play a game .. 4’. Can play soccer well. Can run quickly . Can play volleyball skillfully . Can’t swim quickly . can’t play table tennis well. - Remark and lead in new lesson . b. New lesson : I. Listen. Then practice with a partner: 18’ Listen to the teacher . -Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the -Look at the picture and question: What are they doing ? answer the question . -Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape . -Look at the book and -Explain some new words to Ss . listen to the tape . 1. New words: + Should:Nên( v v) + Ought to ( modal verb ): Nªn (v v v ) + Must: cần thiết phải làm gì(v v v v) Can/ Could: Có thể biết làm g ì/Xin phép có thể làm gì + Paddle ( n ) : vợt (bóng bàn) 2. The structure : making invitation : Listen and write down . Would you like to play table tennis?  I’d like to .  Would you like to + V ? EX : Would you like to come to my house ? have lunch with me ?  He ought to do his homework before playing table tennis . She ought to help her mother . -Have Ss make sentences with the structures . Make sentences with the.

(175) -Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . structures . -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Work in pairs . 3. Answer: -Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers -Practice reading in front for the questions . of the class . -Ask Ss to work in pairs : one asks and one answers. -Read the dialogue again -Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the to find the answers . class . * Correct the mistakes and give the correct Work in pairs . answers : a) He must finish his homework before he plays -Practice in front of the table tennis . class . b) Nam will be ready in a few minutes . c) Ba will finish a question for math . d) Ba has 2 paddles . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . -Write in the notebook. II. Listen. Then practice..... 12’ + Introduce the situation of the lesson . Listen to the teacher . + Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape . -Look at the book and listen to the tape . + Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . -Work in pairs . + Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front of the class . -Practice in front of the - Correct the pronunciation. class. * Practice : -Ask Ss to make similar dialogues using the cues -Make similar dialogues , given in the box replacing the underlined words . using given words . Make example : S1: Come and play volleyball. -Listen . S2: I’m sorry . I don’t think I can . S1: That’s too bad . Why not ? S2: Well, I should visit my grandmother . S1: Can you play on the weekend ? S2: Yes, I can . S1: All right . See you on Saturday afternoon . S2: Ok. Bye . S1: Bye . - Have Ss work in pairs . Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . -Practice in front of the - Correct the mistakes if necessary . class . * Production : - Ask Ss to make their own dialogues , using the 3 Dialogues , using the pictures in the bottom . pictures at the bottom . - Give some cues ; - Using some cues . S1: Come and play ……………. S2: I’m sorry , ……………….. S1: Why not? S2: I must ……………….

(176) S1: Can you …………..? S2: Yes, ………….. S1: …………………. +Have Ss work in pairs . +Call on some pairs to make dialogue in front of the class . - Correct the mistake .. Work in pairs .Some pairs practice in front of the class .. c.Consolidation : * Give some cues and ask Ss to practice : + Nam / before / soccer / do homework . + Lan / when / swimming / swim with adult. + We / after meals / brush teeth . - Make example : S1: What should Nam do before he plays soccer ? S2: He must do his homework . -Have Ss work in pairs . -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. Remark.. 4’. d. Homework - Learn the new words and phrases make examples with the new words - Practice reading B1 again and translate the passage B1 into Vietnamese. - Do exercise B1,2 in exbook - Prepare for the new lesson : unit 13( B3,4). 1’. Listen . Work in pairs . -Practice in front of the class: S1: What should Lan do when she goes swimming ? S2: She must swim with an adult . S1: What should we do after meals? S2: We should brush our teeth . -Retell the main points of this lesson. Copy down homework . Do all exercises,. Week 29 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03/ 2011. Period 83.. Unit 13: ACTIVITIES Lesson 4: B3-5 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know about a new sport: scuba-diving. They continue to practice with modal verbs . - Know some more about some more about new vocabulary and phrases. * Vocabulary : - Surface / - Scuba diving / - Underwater / - To invent => invention - Pearl diver / - Vessel / - To explore / - Special breathing equipment - Human / - Opportunity *Grammar :.

(177) Review the modal verbs . b. Skill: Practice reading skill and answer the questions, practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ps understand the meaning of playing sports, love sports, inventors and love learning English, 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture B3. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson (3’) * Question: ? What does “ should/ ought to/ must” mean? make examples? * Answers: - ought to/ should: ( ex: pupil’s answer) - must( ex: pupil’s answer) Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : 1’ Greetings . - Greetings . Have Ss play a game : Networks 4’ Play a game . Work in groups . - Go to the board and write. Sports. Have Ss work in groups . Call 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write . -Remark and lead in new lesson . b. New lesson. 1. Read. Then answer the questions * Presentation : - Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : what are the pictures about ? -Explain some new words to Ss . a) Vocabulary: + Surface ( n ) bề mặt (trans) + Underwater ( n ) dưới nước (trans) Pearl diver ( n ) = the person who dives underwater and finds the pearls . + To invent ( v => invention ( n ) phát minh Special breathing equipment ( n ) dụng cụ thở đặc biệt + Scuba- diving ( n ) lặn có sdung bình dưỡng khí + Vessel ( n ) = ship : tàu, thuyền. 20’ Listen to the teacher and look at the pictures , then answer the question . Listen and write .Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down.

(178) + To explore ( v ) thám hiểm + Human ( n ) = people + Opportunity ( n ) = chance - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . Correct the pronunciation . b) Questions. True or false?  Have Ss do exercise : True or False prediction ( Questions in B3 at page 137 ) - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . * While – reading : - Have Ss read the passage and check their predictions. - Call on some Ss to give the answers and ask them to correct the false sentences . a) F. Most of the world’s surface is water . b) T c) T d) F. Jacques Couteau invented a deep- sea diving vessel . e) T Reading comprehension : Lucky numbers . 1) How long could a pearl diver stay underwater? 2) Now, How long can a diver stay underwater? 3) LN 4) When did Jacques Couteau die? 5) When did he invent the deep sea diving vessel ? 6) LN 7) What could he study ? 8) How can we explore the oceans now ? -Have Ss work in groups . - Ask Ss to complete the passage with the modal verbs in the box . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . * Post – reading : Have Ss talk about inventions . Give some cues :  Before motorbike, we couldn’t ………. Do exercise . Work in groups . Give the predictions . Read the passage and check the prediction . Give the answers , then correct the false sentences. Play a game in groups. Complete the passage . Exchange the results with the partners . Give the answers.. -Talk about the inventions ..

(179) Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give the results in front of the class . Remark .. 2. Further practice: Gap fill.(B4-137) Asks Ss to complete the passage with modal verbs in the box.. Work in groups . - Give the results in front of the class . Practice with the cues . Inventions : + Special breathing equipment. Explore the oceans . Learn about the sea EX: Before special breathing equipment we couldn’t explore the oceans , we couldn’t learn about the sea …….. + Electricity : Read all nights Watch TV Use computers Listen to music Before electricity , we couldn’t …….. + The motorbikes : Travel far . Get home quickly . Visit places 8’ Complete the passage with modal verbs in the box. - work in group - Answer/ comment and copy. -T. corrects and give them marks  Answer keys: 1.can / 2. Must /3.must not /4.should / 5. Can/ 6. Ought to/ should/ 7.can /should/ 8.should/must. 3. Play with words - Introduce and guide ps to read a poem - Play the tape the first and ask ps to listen & turn on the tape second time and ask ps to read - Call ps to read and correct them if need - Introduce the new words - submarine(n) - frontier(n) - Ask Ss to do exercise in group of 4 or 5 - Ask Ss to give the answers and correct if need , give the right answers. 6’ - Listen and repeat - Read. - Answer.

(180) c. Consolidation ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson?. 2’ - New words and phrases about the sport: Scuba-diving and a inventor who invented a deepsea diving vessel, and use modal verbs clearly. Ss: Listen and remember. T: Feetback to ps remember and ask ps to read the “ Remember” d. Homework - Learn the new words and phrases make examples with the new words - Practice reading B3 again and translate the passage B3 into Vietnamese. - Do exercise B3,4,5 in exbook - Prepare for the new lesson : unit 14( A1). 1’ Write homework .. Week 29 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03/ 2011. Period 84.. Unit 14: Freetime fun Lesson1: a1. Time for tv. 1.The aims a. Knowledge: After the lesson , Ss will learn about a new topic , the activities in freetime such as watching TV , playing chess….. and know specific information about Lan and Hoa . * Vocabulary : - Series - Adventure - Cricket - To sound - to prefer - To guess * Grammar : Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to …………. => I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t …… Phrases( like/ prefer + Ving/to + V...). b. Skill: Practice reading skill and answer the questions, practice listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education:Ps understand the meaning of watching T.V & love learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk, picture A1. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson(6’) * Question: ? Read B3 and answer the questions? - Do you know about the scuba-diving? Where can we play this sport? - what do we need in order to scuba-dive? - We can dive underwater by other way, which the way it is?.

(181) - What do people dive undersea? * Answers: - Yes/ No. Under the sea, ocean - We need special breathing equipment - By a deep sea diving vessel. - They explore the nature and get/ take pearls/... Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : Greetings . 1’ Greetings . Chatting with Ss about their freetime by some 4’ Answer the questions . questions : What do you usually do in your freetime ? Do you like watching TV? Do you like watching news in English? What programs on TV do you like watching? What is your favorite program? How much time do you spend watching TV a day ? …………………. - Remark and lead in new lesson . b. New lesson : + Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce : 2’ Look at the picture and listen . This is the picture of Hoa’s family . Look at it and guess what they do in their freetime ? do they watch TV? + Introduce the situation : Watching TV is Listen to the teacher . one of the most popular activities in freetime . We are going to listen to a dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do Lan’s / Hoa’s family do in their freetime ? 1. New words: 8’ Explain some new words to Ss . Listen and write down . + Series ( n ) : loạt, chuỗi, phim nhiều tập(số nhiều ko đổi) + Adventure ( n )cuộc phiêu lưu (trans) + Cricket ( n )con dế (trans) + To prefer ( v ) = to like ……better … + To sound ( v ) Nghe thấy, tiếng… (trans) + To guess ( v ) = to predict :đoán (trans) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and Read new words in chorus and individually . individually , guess the meanings , then copy down. - Have them play a game : what and where . + Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa usually do in the evening . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions .. - Play a game . + Guess what Lan and Hoa do in the evening . - Give the predictions ..

(182) 2. Practice : + Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers .. 16’ - Look at the books , listen to the tape and check the predictions. - Give the answer : Hoa usually talks about her day, then she reads and sometimes she plays chess. Lan usually watches TV. + Work in pairs reading the dialogue . + Practice reading in front of the class . - Do exercise . + Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers.. + Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then choose the best answers . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the key : a) Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family . b) Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner. c) Hoa’s family doesn’t have a TV because her aunt and uncle don’t like watching TV. d) Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and uncle at night. e) Lan’s family always watches TV in the evening Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .. - Write down.. 3. Production : + Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark .. 5'. c. Consolidation ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson? - New words and phrases with Would you like ..?/ prefer/ like..... T: Feetback to ps remember P: Listen and remember d. Homework: Learn the new words and phrases make examples - Practice reading A1 again and translate the passage A1 into Vietnamese.. 2’. - Work in pairs . + Some pairs practice in front of the class .. Retell the main points of this lesson.. 1’ Write homework ..

(183) - Do exercise A1,2 in exbook; Prepare for the new lesson : unit 14( A2). Week 30 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03/ 2011. Period 85.. Unit 14: Freetime fun Lesson 2: a2. Time for tv. 1.The aims. a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, The students practice the dialogue in order to review the structure “ Would you like to ………?” question and answer to talk about their favorite TV program. - Know more about new vocabulary, understand the dailogue and make up similar dailogue . *Vocabulary : - Detective movie - Pop concert - Classical concert - Cowboy movie - Drama - Advertisement *Grammar : Review : Would you like to + V ? b. Skill: Practice reading skill and listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss know more about Vietnamese people’s culture and ps can choose their favorite programs & love learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson (6’) * Question: ? Read A1 and answer the questions? * Answers: Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up :- Greetings . 1’ Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . 4’ Play a game . - Each group has 3 students theater Series news to take part in the game. adventure. concert. movie. Teacher reads in Vietnamese , Ss slap in English. - State the group which wins the game . - Remark and lead in new lesson . b. New lesson :. Clap the hands ..

(184) - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. 1. Vocabulary: + Cowboy movie ( n ) phim cao bồi + Detective movie ( n ) phim trinh thám + Pop concert ( n ) nhạc pop + Classical concert ( n ) + Drama ( n ) kịch + Advertisement ( n ) quảng cáo - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the pronunciation . - Explain the model sentences : What would you like to watch / see? I’d like to watch / see a cowboy movie . 2. Practice : Ask Ss to look at the advertisements , make up similar dialogues .. 2’ 8’. - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading in front of the class . Listen carefully . 16’ Look at the advertisements and make up similar dialogues . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. S1: Would you like to go to the concert this week ? S2: That sounds good . What would you like to see? S1: There is a classical concert on at Hanoi opera House. S2: Ok. Can you make it on Tuesday night ? S1: Sorry , I have to go to E club . S2: ………. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary .. 3. Further practice : - Give a mapped dialogue : Hoa Lan + Would ……theater? + ….good . What would you ………..? +….easy life …….. Listen . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . -Listen and write down. Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .. 5' - Look at the mapped dialogue ..

(185) youth theater . + Ok …Tuesday night? + Sorry ….E club . + How….Thursday? + Ok . + Fine, let’s ……… - Have Ss work in pairs using mapped dialogue . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class . - Correct the mistake. c. Consolidation: ? Repeat the main knowledge in the lesson?. T: Feetback the structures and how to make up similar dailogue base on the advertisement to ps remember d. Homework: - Learn the new words and phrases make examples with above structures - Practice reading A2 again and translate the passage A2 into Vietnamese and write a dailogue like A2. - Do exercise A3,4 in exbook. - Prepare for the new lesson : unit 14( A3,4). Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . 2’ - New words and phrases with : Would you like to + V...? How about/ what about + V-ing...?/ Let’s + V..... - Can you make it on...Monday night? - Could it be later/ earlier?Yes/ No Ss: Listen and remember. 1’. Write homework.. Week 30 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03/ 2011. Period 86.. Unit 14: Freetime fun Lesson 3: a3,4* Tv in viet nam 1.The aims. a. Knowledge: After the lesson , students will be able to understand about TV in Viet Nam thirty years ago and today . Know more about new vocabulary, understand the.

(186) passage about the culture of Vietnamese people and history of using T.V of people in Viet Nam . * Vocabulary : - Owner / - To change / - To gather / - Might *Grammar : Review the simple present tense and past simple tense . b. Skill: Practice reading skill, listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ps know more about Vietnamese people’s culture and ps can choose their favorite programs & love learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson (5’) * Question: ? Use the invitation/ suggestion structures to invite your friend to see a movie/ have dinner? * Answers: - Let’s go to the cinema/ see a movie. - Would you like to have dinner with my family? Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : Hangman 1’ - Greetings . Greetings . - Have Ss play a game 4’ - Play a game . 3 words : Watch – television – living room - Have Ss guess the words . All class take part in the game - Remark and lead in new lesson . . b. New lesson : I. Read : TV in Viet Nam - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and say about 3’ - Look at the pictures and say them about them . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then - Listen and write . explain some new words to Ss . 1) New words: 6’ - Read new words in chorus + Owner ( n ) : the person who has TV: Người and individually . làm chủ + To gather ( v ) : Tụ tập, tập chung + To change ( v ) :Thay đổi + Might ( modal verb ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and - Play a game . individually . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss play a game : what and where . 2) True or False ? 5’ Ask Ss to do an exercise : True or False prediction. 1) Thirty years ago in Viet Nam , a lot of people had TV sets . 2) These TV owners were very popular ..

(187) 3) The neighbors gathered to watch color programs in the evening . 4) Now , they don’t spend much time together . 5) A few people have TV sets today . - Have Ss do exercise in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . - Ask the rest groups to exchange the results . - Have Ss look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5 . F - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud . - Give some answers and ask students to find out the questions . 1) No, very few people . 2) The black and white programs . 3) They might sleep a little . 4) No, noone . 5) In their own living room . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and ask students to write down . 3) Now complete the summary : - Ask students to read the passage again then find the words to complete the summary . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the answer key : 1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular 5. evening 6. gather 7. they 8. today 9. have 10. life 11. know - Call on some students to read the summary aloud II. Play with words . - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : what is she doing ? - Play the tape for students . - Ask students to look at the books and read after the tape . - Call on some students to read aloud . - Correct their pronunciation .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Exchange the result. - Give the answers . - Some students read the passage aloud . 5' - Read the passage again and find the questions for the answers .. - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class. 8' - Read the passage again and complete the summary . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answer in front of the class .. - Read the summary aloud . 5' - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Listen to the tape . - Look at the book and read after the tape . - Read aloud ..

(188) c. Consolidation : 2’ - Have students work in groups discussing the - Work in groups . advantanges and disadvantanges of TV . - Call on some groups to present their ideas . - Give the ideas in front of the - Correct if necessary . class . d. Homework : 1’ Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences - Write homework . with them - Do exercise 3,4 at page 89 in workbook . - Prepare part B1,2 .. Week 30 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 03/ 2011. Period 87.. Unit 14: Freetime fun Lesson 4 : b1,2. What’s on ? 1.The aims. a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, The students continue to practice the topic about TV , they talk about their favorite programs and the time of some programs on TV . - Know more about new vocabulary, numbers and structures: Like, prefer + V-ing, What’s on T.V today? * Vocabulary : - Sports show - Children’s program - Early news - Weather forecast - The world today - A first ful of dollars’ * Grammar : What kinds of programs do you like ? b. Skill: Practice reading skill, listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ps understand the using of T.V in thier life and history of T.V, choose their favorite programs & love learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , ….

(189) 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson(5’) * Question: ? Talk some information about history of using T.V of people in Viet Nam? * Answers: In 1960s in VN most people didn’t have a T.V set, today many families have T.v set........ Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : Jumbled words 1’ - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have students play a game . 4’ - Play a game . + RGMAPOR=>…………………….….. + Program + NEATERGE=>……….………………. + Teenager + SUMIC=>…………………………….. + Music + VOMEI=>…………………………….. + Movie + REHATTE=>…………………..…….. + Theater + ODARI=>……………………………... + Radio - Call on 2 students to go to the board and - Go to the board and write . write down . - Remark and give marks . b. New lesson: I. Listen . Then practice with a partner . 18’ - Ask students to look at the picture and - Look at the picture and answer the question: What’s on TV ? answer the question . - Introduce the situation of the dialogue , then - Listen and guess . ask students to guess what kinds of programs Nga/ Ba likes. - Call on some students to give their - Give the prediction . predictions . - Look at the book , listen to - Have students look at the book and listen to the tape and check the the tape and check their prediction . prediction . - Have students work in pairs reading the - Work in pairs . dialogue . - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in - Practice in front of the class . front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . * Now answer : - Ask students to read the dialogue again to - Read the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions . find the answers . - Have students work in pairs . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in - Practice asking and answering front of the class . in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers : a. No, she doesn’t, because there aren’t many good programs for teenagers . b. Ba likes to watch sports shows, cartoons and movies . c. Nga likes to watch programs about.

(190) teenagers in other countries . d. Because they don’t play the kind of music she likes . e. She is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book . - Ask students to write in the notebooks . II. Listen . write the times of the programs . - Have students look at 5 programs in part 2 . - Ask them to predict the times of these programs . - Call on some students to give their predictions . - Ask them to listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Play the tape again for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Have students listen to the tape again and check the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : a. Children’s programs : 5:00 b. Early News : 6:00 c. Weather forecast : 6:10 d. The world Today : 6: 15 e. Movie : “ A firstful of dollars” : 7:00 - Have students write the answers in the notebooks . c. Consolidation : - Give some cues then ask students to practice asking and answering : + Morning News + Teenagers. + The world of animals . + Music programs . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . d. Homework : - Learn by heart new words . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in workbook . - Prepare part B3,4 .. - Write in the notebook . 14' - Look at the programs in the book . - Predict the time of the programs . - Give the prediction in front of the class . - Listen to the tape . - Give the answers. - Listen to the tape and check the answers.. - Write in the notebooks. 2’ Work in pairs .. - Practice in front of the class . 1’ - Write down homework..

(191) Week 31 Planning date: ...... / 03/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 03 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 88.. Unit 14: Freetime fun Lesson 5 : b3,4. What’s on ? 1.The aims a. Knowledge: After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs . They will continue to know some more vocabulary about TV programs . * Vocabulary : - Audience/ - To contest / - Artist /- Contestant /- To perform / - Folk music - Imports / - To include / - Satellite / - Cable TV * Grammar : Review : the simple present tense . b. Skill: Practice reading skill, listening, speaking and writing skill. c. Education: Ss understand the using of T.V in their life, choose their favorite programs & love learning E.L 2. Preparation * Teacher: Books, reference book, radio and tape, chalk. * Students: Lessons, book, exercisebooks, notebooks, studying tools , … 3. Procedure a.Checking the old lesson(6’) * Question: ? Write sentences use the cue words? a. What/ Minh/like/ do/freetime? - Minh/ like/ listen/ pop music. b. Chi/ not/really/ like/ watch/ sports on T.V. * Answers: a. What does Minh like doing in his freetime? - Minh likes listening to pop music. b. Chi doesn’t really like watching sports on T.V. Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities * Warm up : Noughts and Crosses 1’ - Greetings . - Greetings . - Play a game . - Have students play a game : All class take part in the game - Play game in 2 groups . Early News The world Weather today forecast EX: What kind of programs do you like? Cartoons Sports shows Movies I like to watch Early News . - Look at three pictures and Teenagers Music News in 4’ identify them . English.

(192) - Listen and write . Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down . - Play a game . _ Do an exercise .. - Have students play in 2 groups . - State the group which wins the game. b. New lesson : 3. Listen and read . Then answer the questions . - Work in groups . - Ask students to look at the three pictures - give the prediction . and identify them Listen to the tape and check . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then - Give the answers in front of the explain some new words : class + Audience : The person who watches the 23 - Read the passage aloud. shows . ’ - Work in pairs . + Artist ( n ) : A famous singer . - Practice asking and answering + To perform ( v ) : in front of the class . + To contest ( v ) = To compete - Read the words in the box . + Contestant ( n ) = Competitor - Listen and write . + Folk music ( n ) : - Complete the passage . + Imports ( n ) = foreign series . - Exchange the results with the + To include ( v ) : 8’ partners . - Have students read new words in chorus and - Give the results in front of the individually . class . - Check new words by playing a game called - Read the completed passage rub out and remember . aloud . - Have students do an exercise : T or F - Take a survey . prediction . Listen . 1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular Complete the passage . Use the TV programs . words in the box . 2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music . - Ask students to look at the 3. There are contests of knowledge . words in the box and read them 4. The contestants are students , workers , TV aloud . viewers . - Explain some new words to 5. Imports are very expensive . students . - Have students work in groups in 2 minutes . Ex: S1: Do you want to hear pop - Call on some groups to give their 6’ music ? predictions . S2: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t . - Ask students to look at the books , listen to Or : S1: What TV programs do the tape and check their predictions . you want to see? - Call on some students to give the answers . S2: I want to see the contests - Correct and give the correct answers : . 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 1. Around 2. Watch 3. Listen - Have students read the passage aloud . 4. Series - Correct their pronunciation . 5. Show 6. Like 7. Station - Ask students to work in pairs asking and 8. Receive asnwering the questions in the books . 9. Cities 10 . Possible - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Work in groups ..

(193) class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers . a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists . b. They are students , workers or family members . c. Imports usually include police and hospitals . d. Students’ answer. 4. Write. + To be possible : the same meaning with Can. + Satellite ( n ) : + Cable TV ( n ) : - Have students complete the passage , using the words in the box . - Ask students to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the results in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : - Ask 2 students to read the passage aloud . c. Consolidation : - Have students take a survey : _ Have students work in groups . ( Each group has a secretary ) d. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook . - Review for doing a test in the next lesson. - Write homework .. 2’. 1’. Week 31 Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 89.. WRITTEN TEST ( 45’) ENGLISH 7 1. The aims. a. Knowledge..

(194) By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know their ability to do the test with their knowledge have learnt in unit 12,13 & 14. b. Skill. Improve communicative skills ( reading, listening, writing) and language focus , work in individual to complete sentences and a passage. c. Education. Educate Ss to do own something. 2. Preparation. a. Teacher : Teaching plan, the photos of questions, tape and radio b. Students : Learn the old leson, pens. 3. Procedure. CHỦ ĐỀ Listen Language focus - Pronunciation. NHẬN BIẾT TNKQ TL Q1 2. THÔNG HIỂU TNKQ TL. VẬN DỤNG TNKQ TL. TỔNG 5 2. Q2. 11 1. - Tenses - Prepositions - Vocab Read. Q3. Q4 1.5. 1. 3.5. Q5. 6 2.5. Write. 2.5 Q6. 4 2. Tổng. 2Q. 1Q 3. 2Q 1.5. 1Q 3.5. 2 25. 2. * Organization: Check numbers of students Đề 7A I. Choose the word which has underlined letter pronouned differently from the others.(1mark) 1. a. exciting b. spring c. tradition swimming 2. a. joined preferred c. played d. looked 3. a. here spend c. well d. very 4. a. why what c. when d. who II. Choose the right words to fill in the blanks: (2marks) 1. ..................... you like to go to the theater with us?. 10. d. b. b. b..

(195) A. Will. B. Are C. Could. D.. Would 2. Don't play soccer in the street. It's very ...................... A. dangerous B. safe C. important D. careful 3. He is a famous ......... A. invention B. inventor C. inventive D. inventory 4. We .......... table tennis to badminton A. like B. would like C. prefer D. love 5. My sister likes ......... the piano. A. playing B. plays C. play D. played 6.What's ........ television tonight? A. in B. on C. of D. at 7. You ....... watch TV so much. It's not good for your eyes. A. must B. should C. shouldn't D. can't 8. Where ............ he born ? A. is B. does C. were D. was III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets (2marks) 1. Many people prefer (fly) .............. to (go) ........... by sea. 2. He (move)........ to Paris tomorrow and (stay) ............ for six months in there. 3. What ........ you (do) ........... yesterday morning? I (play) .......... video games. 4. Children shouldn't (drink) ........... coffee. It (not be) ........... good for their health. 1. 2. 3. 4. IV. Read the passage carefully, then decide if the statements are True (T) or Flase (F). (2 marks) Lewis Carrol was the pen name of Charles Dodgson, the writer who wrote a famous book for children, " Alice's Adventures in Wonderland". Charles Dodgson was born in Engliand in 1832. When Charles finished school, he became a student at Oxford University. He studied mathematics and latre he began to teach this subject at the university. Charles had no family, but he loved children very much. he often visited his friend, Henry George Liddell. Henry had three little girls and Charles liked Alice most. He often told her interesting stories about the adventures of a little girl in Wonderland. Alice likes these stories very much. When Alice Liddell was ten years old, she asked Charles to write down these stories for her. The name of the little girl in the stories was Alice, too. Then Charles decided to publish the book and took the pen name of Lewis Carrol..

(196) 1. Lewis Carroll was the real name of Charles Dodgson. 2. He was born in England in 1835. 3. Charles Dodgson taught mathematics at Oxford University. 4. Dodgson had no children 5. Alice Liddell was the main character in the stories. 6. " Alice Adventures in Wonderland" is a famous children 's book V. Complete the following sentences in such a way that it means nearly the same as the one above (2marks) 1. You must wash your hands before meals. You have ...................................................................... 2. Children are interested in picture books very much. Children like.................................................. 3. Why don't we go to the beach? What about .................................................................................? 4. The sailors like the sea better than the land. The sailors prefer .................................................................. VI. Listen then decide if the statements are True (T) or Flase (F). (1 mark) 1. Mr. Tien, is a teacher of English at a Secondary school in Ha Noi. 2. He has two days off a week : Saturday and Sunday. 3. He never plays table tennis. 4. He often watch TV until midnight. Đề 7B I. Choose the word which has underlined letter pronouned differently from the others.(1mark) 1. a. exciting b. spring c. like bike 2. a. stopped prefered c. washed d. looked 3. a. there spend c. well d. here 4. a. why what c. who d. where II. Choose the right words to fill in the blanks: (2marks) 1. ..................... you like to go to the theater with us? A. Would B. Are Could. d. b. b. b.. C. D. Will.

(197) 2. It's very ...................... when children play soccer in the street. A. safe dangerous C. important careful 3. He is a famous ......... A. teacher B. teach teaching D. teachor 4. We .......... playing table tennis to going out. A. like B. would like prefer D. love 5. Would you like..............the guitar? A. playing B. plays play D. played 6.What's ........ the television program tonight? A. in B. on C. of D. at 7. You ....... play games so much. It's not good for your eyes. A. must B. should C. shouldn't can't 8. Where ............ you born ? A. is B. does C. were was. B. D. C. C. C. to. D.. D.. III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets (2marks) 1. My aunt ( buy )…………………………………me a new dress last week. 2. Would you like ( play ) ………………………table tennis, Nam? – I’d like to, but I can’t. 3. You should ( do)………………………………your homework everyday. 4. Hoa likes (spend) ……………………………..time with her aunt and uncle at night. 1. 2. 3. 4. IV. Read the passage carefully, then decide if the statements are True (T) or Flase (F). (2 marks) Mr.Minh is worried about his health. He always fells tired, and he doesn’t know why. Last week, he went to see doctor Thanh. The doctor thinks Mr.Minh feels tired because he is too fat. According to the doctor, Mr.Minh must eat less cheese, and less meat. He must eat more fresh vegetables, fruit and fish. He must drink less beer and more boiled water. Mr.Minh is trying doctor Thanh’s diet, he hopes he is well soon. Statements T F 1. Mr.Minh is worried about his health. 1. ……… ……… 2. Mr Minh thinks that he feels tired because he is too fat.. 2. ……. ………. 3. He shouldn’t eat more fresh vegetables, fruit and. 3. ……. ……….

(198) fish. 4. He is trying doctor Thanh’s diet.. 4. ……. ………. V. Complete the following sentences in such a way that it means nearly the same as the one above (2marks) 1. We should do our homework before playing. We ought ...................................................................... 2. He sing very well. He is .................................................. 3. They are fast swimmers. They ................................................................................. 4. My brother is a skillful volleyball player. My brother .................................................................. VI. Listen then decide if the statements are True (T) or Flase (F). (1 mark) 1. Mr. Tien, is a teacher of English at a Secondary school in Ha Noi. 2. He has two days off a week : Saturday and Sunday. 3. He never plays table tennis. 4. He often watch TV until midnight.. Week 31. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 90.. Trả và chữa bài kiểm tra 1.The aims a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know their ability to check the test compare with the the keys. Review all the knowledge which they’ve done in the test. b.Skills: Pupils train reading and speaking. c. Education: Making pupils more carefully. 2. Prepare. *. Teacher: Teaching plan. *. Pupils : Textbook, notebook, review all the knowledge in unit 12 & unit 14. 3.Procedure a.Check the old lesson( No) T 5’. Teacher’s activities Greet and give the game Have ss play game in group , find the mistakes. Contents * Warm up : Find the mistakes in these sentences : 4. Hoa is absent from class yesterday 5. My mother writed sick note for me. 6. My sister is 45 kilo. b. New lesson.

(199) 7’. Check and remark. Here are some common mistakes * In question 1 ( Listen ) ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… Lead in the lesson ……………………………………………………………… * In question 2 (pronunciation ) ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… Teacher lists a list * In question 3 ( vocabulary ) of sentences with ……………………………………………………………… the common ……………………………………………………………… mistakes in four ……………………………………………………………… questions.( The ……………………………………………………………… mistakes are written * in question 4 ( tenses ) on the extra board ……………………………………………………………… or poster ) ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… * in question 5 ( Reading ) ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… Have ss find the ……………………………………………………………… mistakes and * in question 6 ( Writing) correct them in ……………………………………………………………… group ……………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………… Go around and help ……………………………………………………………… them to correct III. Student – student Correction : ( pair work or group Have ss give their work ) corrections and check 2. What mistake is it ? Now correct with a pencil. Don’t overwrite the mistake Give the key for common mistakes c. Consolidation : Summary some basic mistakes and Correct mistake again . ( hand out about 10 sentences for correcting the common mistakes ) show them how to KEY correct . I. Choose the word which has underlined letter Have them take pronouned differently from the others.(1mark) note How many mistakes are there ? How do we correct them ?. 23'. 7’. - Giáo viên trả bài,đưa ra đáp án và biểu điểm chi tiết. Error Analysis:.

(200) 1.a; II. Choose the right words to fill the blanks: (2marks) 1.Would 2. dangerous. 4. prefer 6. on 7. shouldn't. 3’. 8.was III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets (2marks) 1.flying - going 3.will ..... do play 2. moved - spent IV. Read the passage carefully, then dicide if the statements are True (T) or Flase (F). (3marks) 1. F 5.F 2.F 6.T Give the homework V. Complete the following sentences in such a way that it means nearly the same as the one above (2marks) 1. You ought to wash your hands before meals. 2.Children are interested in picture books. 3. Let's go to the beach. 4. The sailors prefer the sea to the land. d. Home work - Read over the test again and correct the last mistakes yourslves at home - Prepare for unit 15 ( A 1). Week 32. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Period 91.. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Unit 15: Going out Lesson 1: A1. Video games. I. The aims :.

(201) After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not doing something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games and disadvantages of playing video games . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Video games - Arcade - Amusement center - Addictive 2. Grammar : Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade . No, I won’t . III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board . V. Procedure : Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Warm up : 1’ Greetings . - Greetings . - Play a game . - Have Ss play a game : Networks . Entertainment s. 2 groups take part in the game . Discuss in groups , then Ss go to the board and write down .. - Have Ss play game in 2 groups . 4’ - Remark and lead in new lesson . - Listen and answer the 2. New activities : question . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : - Listen and write . What can you see in the picture ? *Vocabulary: + Amusement center (n) A place where we - Read new words . can go to play some games for relaxing .Trung tõm giải trớ. - Play a game . + Video games ( n ) : - Look at the book and listen to + Arcade(n)/a:’keid/ nơi mua bỏn cú mỏi the tape . vũm, khu vui chơi 23 - Read after the tape . + Addictive ( adj ) nghiện, cú tỏc dụng gõy ’ - Work in pairs . nghiện - Practice in front of the class. - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Listen . - Have students play a game : what and where . - Make examples as model . - Have students look at the dialogue and listen - Find the answers for the to the tape . 8’ questions - Ask students to read after the tape ..

(202) - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce the new model sentence : + Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade. => No, I won’t . ( Advise somebody not to do something .) - Ask students to make examples as model . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions in the book . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Have some students go to the board and write the correct answers . - Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . a. He’s going to the amusement center . b. He’s going to play video games . c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week . d. No, he doesn’t . e. He usually stays for about an hour . f. Because video games can be addictive . g. He will do his homework later . 3. Consolidation : - Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look at carefully . YOU YOUR FRIEND Where ….going ? Amusement center What …….do? video games How often ? 2/ week Don’t spend …. video games … Don’t forget …… homework . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . 4. Homework : - Learn by heart new words and structure by making 2 sentences with each .. - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - go to the board and write the answers . - Write in the notebooks .. - Look at the mapped dialogue . 6’. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Write homework . 2’. 1’.

(203) - Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook . - Prepare part A2,3 .. Week 32. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Period 92.. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Unit 15: Going out. Lesson 2: A2,3. Video games I. The aims : By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and some disadvantages of playing video games . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Inventor / - Social skill / - Dizzy / - Premises - To develop / - Robbery / - To identify / - Industry 2. Grammar : - Modal verbs . - The present simple tense . III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V. Procedure : Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Warm up : 1’ Greetings . - Greetings . - Answer T’s questions . - Ask students some questions such as : + Do you like playing video games ? + How often do you play video games ? - Listen and do exercise . + How long do you usually spend playing video games? + What do you think about playing video games ? 4’ - Work in groups . ……………… - Give the prediction . - Remark and lead in new lesson . - Listen to the tape and check the 2. New activities : prediction . A. Listen and read . - Give the answers . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask students to do an exercise : True or False prediction. - Listen to the tape again. 1. Children like playing video games.

(204) because they are good fun . - Read new words in chorus and 2. It’ s very good for children to spend too individually . much time on their own 3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children become tired . 23 - Read the passage in silent . 4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their ’ - Read aloud . friends 5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young . Students read new words in chorus - Have students work in groups . and individually . - Call on some groups to give their prediction. - Ask students to look at the books and - Read the passage again to find listen to the tape then check their the answers . prediction . - Call on some students to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : - Exchange the results with the 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T partners . - Have students listen to the tape again and - Give the answers . introduce some new words : 8’ * Vocabulary: + Inventor ( n )( The person who invents videogames )người sáng tạo, người sáng chế - Write down . + Dizzy ( adj ) :hoa mắt, choáng váng + To develop ( v ) : phát triển - Listen and write . + Social skill ( n ) :kĩ năng giao tiếp. - Ask students to read the text in silent . - call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . * Now answer , complete the sentences . - Read new words in chorus and - Have students read the text again to find individually . out the answers . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . 6’ - Call on some students to give the answers - Complete the passage . in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . - Exchange the results . a) Many young people play video games . - Give the answers . b) Some inventors of video games become very rich c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends . d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games - Read aloud . - Have students write in the notebooks . - Write ..

(205) B. Complete the passage with the words in the box . - Explain the request of the exercise then 2’ - Work in groups . introduce some new words . -Some Ss retell the main points of + To identify ( v ) : nhận dạng, nhận ra; the lesson. đồng cảm với, coi như nhau - Demonstrate the ideas . + Premises ( n ) :đất đai,nhà cửa,công sở + Robbery ( n ) => robber ( n ) vụ trộm - Write homework . cướp + Industry ( n ) : nền công nghiệp 1’ - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students complete the passage . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partners. - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class - Correct and give the key : 1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are 6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy 10. show - Call on 2 students to read the completed passage aloud - Ask students to write down . 3. Consolidation : - Have students work in groups discussing about the disadvantages of playing video games . - Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in front of the class . -Retell the main points of this lesson. 4. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 3,4 in workbook . - Prepare the next lesson .. Week 33. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 93.. Unit 15: Going out Lesson 3: A2. Video games.

(206) I. The aims : After the lesson , students will be able to give the advice with should and shouldn’t . II. Language content : Review modal verbs with should and shouldn’t . III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board . V. Procedure : Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Warm up :- Greetings . Greetings . - Have students play a games : Slap the - Play a game . board . + Play outdoors . /+ Take part in activities . + Play with friends ./ + Play video games ./ - Play in 2 groups . + Stay up late . - Have students play in 2 groups . - Remark and lead in new lesson . - Find the sentences using modal 2.Presentation : verbs . - Have students read the text in part A2 - Give the results . again then find out the sentences using modal verbs . - Complete the table . - Call on some students to give the sentences in front of the class . - Give the table of grids and ask them to - Make sentences . complete . Activities in freetime Should Shouldn ’t + Play outdoors . - Work in pairs . + Play video games for - Practice in front of the class . a long time . S1: We shouldn’t play video + Take part in activities games for a long time . with friends. S2: No, we shouldn’t . + Spend a little time S1: We should take part in playing video games. activities with friends. + Spend too much time S2: Yes , we should . 3. Practice : - Ask students to use the grids to make sentences about what they should do and shouldn’t do . Ex : We should play outdoors . Yes , we should . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .. - Play a game . 2 groups take part in the game . - Make sentences with should and shouldn’t ..

(207) - Correct the mistake . 4. Production : - Write homework . - Have students play a game : Noughts and crosses -Some Ss retell the main points of the lesson. Play Spend much Take part in - Demonstrate the ideas. outdoors money on video outdoors games activities Stay up too Play video Be with people - Write homework . late games too much with our age Spend little Study hard Spend too much playing time on our own video games - Ask students to make sentences with should and shouldn’t . Ex: We should play outdoors . We shouldn’t play video games too much. - Remark . * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson 5. Homework : - Learn by heart all structure grammar of this lesson - Write 5 sentences with should and shouldn’t . - Prepare part B1,2 .. Week 33. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 94.. Week 34. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 95. Unit 15: Going out. Lesson 4: B1,2. In the city I. The aims : After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in the country . Practice 4 skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing ..

(208) II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense . III. Technique : Brainstorming , Asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , Pictures about the city and the country . V. Procedure : Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Warm up : 1’ Greetings . - Greetings . - Play a game . - Have students play a game : Wordsquare R O B H G I E N . H Discuss in groups to find the words O C L U B Z W S C O Z K S J V Q I E which relate to the city and the D R S Y M N T O G country . M Z J R K Y T N A O T O R. P C T R X L B I. O A D K. Q F R E. Z F N S. E J I C U B Q K. L L I V. - Work in groups . - Look at the picture and answer the 4’ question . - Answer T’s questions .. - Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and country . - Have students work in groups . -Remark and lead in new lesson . 2. New activities : - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : What is the picture about ? - Ask students some questions such as : + Do you like to live in the city or in the country ? Why / why not ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the city or in the country . - Play the tape for students . - Have students give the answers . - Introduce some new words to students : + The rest ( n ) :Phần còn lại, số còn lại + Awake ( adj ) :Thức giấc, thức, tỉnh. - Listen . - Look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the questions . - Give the answers . - Listen and write . 23 ’ - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Play a game . - Discuss about life in the city and life in the country ..

(209) + To scare ( v ) :Sợ hãi + To hate ( v ) = to dislike + To get used to + N .quen với, thích nghi với + Direction ( n ) : sự điều khiển, sự chỉ huy - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : rub out and remember. - Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the country . * Brainstorming : Life in the city Life in the country Crowded Little traffic ………… ………….. - Have students work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their ideas . - Have students read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions . - Have students play a game : Lucky numbers 1. Where did Hoa live before ? 2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ? 3. LN . 4. What does Hoa do in the evening ? 5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ? 6. Does She like the city ? 7. LN 8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue? - Remark and ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . 3. Consolidation : - Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work in pairs discussing about life in the city and life in the country . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct and remark.. 8’. - Work in groups . - Give the ideas . - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class - Find the answers .. 6’ - Play a game in 2 groups . - Write the answers in the notebooks . - Discuss about life in the city and in the country . - Work in pairs . 2’ - Practice in front of the class . - Write homework .. 1’.

(210) 4. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books. - Prepare part B3,4 .. Week 34 Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Period 96.. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Unit 15: Going out Lesson 4: B3.4. In the city. I. The aims : After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and what she could do . They practice reading and listening skills . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rarely - To socialize 2. Grammar : - Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . - Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V. Procedure : Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Warm up : 1’ Greetings . - Greetings . - Play a game . - Have students play a game : Networks country city - Work in groups . - Go to the board and write . Have students work in groups . - Have students go to the board and write . - Remark . 2. New activities : A. Read . - Introduce the content of the text : The text. - Listen . - Read the text and find out 4’ what she could do ..

(211) tells how Hoa got used to the city life . - Read in silent . - Ask students to read the text and find out - Give the answers in front of what she could do the class . - Have students read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class. - Listen and write . - Call on some students to read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation . * Vocabulary: Introduce new words : + Rarely ( adv ) :hiếm khi + To socialize ( v ) : giao tiếp, quan hệ bạn bè + Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive 23 Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize ’ with her friends . - Make sentences . Like / prefer + gerund . - Answer the questions . Ex: Hoa likes playing chess very much . - Ask students to make sentences as model . - Give some more questions and ask students to answer : a) What did Hoa and her friends often do - Work in pairs . together ? - Ask and answer in front of the b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat class . out in the evening ? c) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her - Make a list of the things Hoa village ? does in the evening . d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ? 8’ - Exchange the results . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front - Give the answers in front of of the class . the class . - Correct the mistakes . - Ask students to read the text again then make - Go to the board and write . a list of the things Hoa does in the evening , - Write in the notebooks . using the simple present tense. - Have students exchange the results with their - Listen to the teacher . partners . - Call on some students to give their answers in - Give the activity of each front of the class. 6’ picture . - Call one student to go to the board and write down . - Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks . - Guess and write the names B. Listen . Match each name to an activity . next to the pictures . - Introduce the aim of the listening . - Ask students to look at the pictures and give - Listen to the tape and check the activity of each picture . the prediction . - Call on some students to give the answers in - Listen..

(212) front of the class . - Have students guess and write the names next to the pictures . - Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Play the tape for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Play the tape again for students to check the answers - Correct and give the key : Ba- b Hoa- a Nga – d Nam – c Lan – f An – e 3. Consolidation : - Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . 4. Homework : - Write the things that you often do in the evening . - Do exercises in part B in workbook . - Prepare unit 15 –B4,5.. Week 35. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. - Give the answers in front of the class . 2’ - Check the answers .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . 1’ - Write homework.. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 97.. Revision I/ The aims : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidation all structure grammar .The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises well . -Develop 4 skills: L,S,R,& W. II. Language content :* Review The simple past tense . / Preposition of position / How far…? / How much…? / Compound adjectives / Directions More,less,fewer. / Why-because… / Imperatives ./ Like/dislike … III/Technique: Eliciting, pair work, group work..

(213) IV/Teaching aids: T: Textbook, tape, cassette, sub- board. S: EL books, Exercises books, notebook. V. Procedure: Teacher’s activities *HOW MUCH IS IT ? *Form : How much is it / are they ? It is / They are + price. How much +be + S ? (How much + do/ does + S + cost?) à It’s/ They’re +( price ) *Use: Ask and answer about the prices. *The simple past tense : *Form: To be( was/were)… S + V_ed … V_qkbqt … *Use: Diễn tả hành động xảy ra và kết thóc tại 1 thời điểm , khoảng thời gian x¸c định trong qu¸ khứ. - T asks ss to write the past form of the verbs in the table (p.97) Eg : buy -- > bought Note : Ordinary verbs are divided into 2 kinds :  regular verbs (- ed ) / (-d)  irregular verbs - T asks ss to do ex b 4 (p.97-98) - T gets feedback * Answer key : b, played / talked / bought / worked / sent c, help my mom and study English. *.More / Less and fewer : * More + countable noun ( nhiều hơn) * Fewer + countable noun ( it hơn) * Less + uncountable noun (it hơn) Asks ss to say the use of those then write the sentences according to the pictures. Eg : Before : there were 4 bananas Now : there are fewer bananas. * Prepositions :* Matching: 1. near a. ở bªn tr¸i 2. opposite b. ở gần. T 1’. Ss’ activities -Greetings. Play a game. -Two groups take part in the game.. -Listen to the teacher. 5’ -Read the questions in the book and guess the answers ( work in groups) -Give the predictions. 7’. -Listen and check the predictions. -Listen and write down.. -Read new words in chorus and individually, guess meaning then copy down. - Ss to answer some qs about the use, form of the simple past tense : Give the answers.. Check the answers Write the answers in the notebooks..

(214) 3. between c. ở bªn ph¶i 4. beside/ next to d. đối diện 5. to the right e. ở giữa 6. to the left f. bªn c¹nh T asks ss to retell some prepositions then look at the map and write the location of each store. a. Eg : The restaurant is next to the bookstore. *Why-because… Why + do/does + S + V …? - Because + S + V… *Model sentences : + What was wrong with you ? I had a headache. + What was wrong with her ? She had a bad cold.  Note : Hỏi và trả lời về tình trạng sức khỏe :. 5’. Give the answers. Look at the book and listen to the tape. Read the text in silent Read the text aloud.. -Complete the story with the suitable words.. What + was wrong with + pronoun? S + had + ( sickness ) * word cue drill : Lan/ headache She/ toothache He/ flu. You/ a cold Ba/ stomachache. Model sentences : Position of adv of manner: - S + V + (O) + adv of manner - S + be/ look … + adj - (a/ an) + adj + N Gammar: Adj. + ly = adv of manner Ex: bad – badly Slow – slowly But good – well  Note : Express preferences :  ( Diễn tả ý thích hoặc ko thích ) + S + auxilary V, too. So, auxilary V + not + either. + S + auxilary V + not + either. Neither + auxilary V + S. *Grammar: + S + ought to/ must/ can/ should +. -Look at the picture and answer the questions.. Exchange the result with the partner. Ex: He plays soccer (good/ well) He’s a (good/ well) player 14’ - (to) play – player - (to) run – runner - (to) cycle – cyclist *Examples: Example : S1 : What was wrong with Lan ? S2 : She had a heachache. **a. S1 : I like spinach and cucumbers S2 : So do I / I do, too. b. S1 : I don’t like pork. S2 : Neither do I/ I don’t, either. a. Thích: I do, too So do I b.Không thích : I don’t either Neither do I 8’. -Give the answers in front of the class. Listen to the teacher. -Write homework..

(215) V(inf ) + S + shouldn’t/ ought not to + V(inf) * Note : hỏi về sở thích. What would you like to + v (inf) ? I’d like to + V ( inf ) + N (ten phim ) * Model sentences : What kinds of programs do you like? I like program about teenagers. * Note : Hỏi và trả lời về ctrinh TV bạn thích What kinds of programs do/ does + S + like ? - S + like(s) + program about + Chương trình.. *Model Sentences: Don’t spend too much time in the arcade. No, I won’t. * Note : Lời khuyên , Câu mệnh lệnh - Don’t spend too much time in + place. Nhận lời : No. I won’t.. - Retell the content of the lesson individually. - Copy down homework. 3’. 2’. * Consolidation: - Retell the main points of this lesson. * Homework: - Do all exercises. - Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar. - Prepare for next lesson.. Week 35. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 98. Unit 16: People and places Lesson 1: A1,2 (154 – 155) A. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to talk about name of the countries in Asia and their capital cities. I. Knowledge ; -The countries. II. Skills: - Speaking . III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer. B. Procedures: I. Settlements: - Greetings. T : Good morning , class. Ss: Good morning , teacher. T : How are you?.

(216) Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you? T; How many students are there in your class? S1: There are ........... II. Warm -up: *Matching Bangkok China Beijing Laos Kuala Lumpur Thailand Phnom penh Myanmar Vientiane Indinesia Yangon Cambodia Jakarta Malaysia III/New lesson: Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation: a. Pre- teach: - (a) postcard : (realia) - (a) capital : (example) - (a) pilot : (explanation) - (a) region : (symnonym) Checking:R&R b. Set the sence: Answer the questions: 1. Where is it? 2. Where is Bangkok? 3. Do you go to Thailand? c. Dialogue: A1p. 154 - Work in pairs to read in pairs: * Matching: p.155 -Work in two groups to match. * Answer key: d. Modal sentences: Ex: A: Where does Ba's uncle fly to? B : He flies to Bangkok. A: Where is that? B: It's in Thailand. 2. Practice: Word cue drills a. Bangkok /Thailand b. Beijing /China c. Kuala Lumpur / Malaysia d. Phnom penh / Cambodia e. Vientian / Laos f. Yangon / Myanmar g. Jakarta / Indinesia 3. Further -practice: Do exercise A3 p. 100 - correct: IV. Consolidation: -The countries. V. Homework: 1. Do exersise A1-2 p. 98-99in exercise book. 2. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: A3( p. 156 in. T 5’. Ss’ activities - Practice new words( listen and repeat -> give meaning / stress. - Copy down.. -Answer the questions. 31 S1: ’ S2: - Work in two groups - Give feed back. Tigers Lions - Give feed back. - Work in pairs. - Work in pairs - Give feed back. Ex: A: Where does Ba's uncle fly to? B : He flies to 6’ Bangkok. A : Where is that? B : It's in Thailand..

(217) text book). 2’ - Give feed back.. 1’. Week 35. Planning date: ...... / 04/ 2011. Teaching date: ......... / 04 / 2011 7A ..... / 04/ 2011. Period 99.. Unit 16: People and places Lesson 2: A3,4 (156 – 157) A. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read for details about tourist attractions in South- east Asia and places I. Knowledge ; - The places. The tourist actractions in South- east Asia. II. Skills: - Listening and Reading . III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer. B. Procedures: I. Settlements: - Greetings. T : Good morning , class. Ss: Good morning , teacher. T : How are you? Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you? T; How many students are there in your class? S1: There are ........... II. Warm -up: Slap the board III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities A/A3 1. Pre- Listening: a. Open- prediction: - SS predict and fill in formation about pilot's schedule in the table.. T 5’. Ss’ activities Gess to fill in the table: Monday/Vientiane Tuesday/Singapore Wednesday/Yangon Thursday/Bangkok.

(218) Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/ Friday/Singapore Friday Saturday/Hong Kong Saturday/Sunday Sunday/Jakarta 2. While -listening: A3 p. 156 Answer key: a. - Listen : Monday b.Corrects Bangkok and Singapore B/A4: Tuesday/Singapore 1* Pre- reading: Wednesday/Jakarta a. Pre- teach: Thursday/Bali -Destinations(n) điểm đến, nơi đi tới Friday/Bali ( trans) 31’ Saturday/Hong Kong - (an) attraction: Sự hấp dẫn, lôi cuốn Sunday (explanation) - Give feed back. - (a) monument:đài tưởng niệm, tượng - Listen đài (translation) - Give feed back: - traditional(adj) thuộc truyền thống - Work in pairs. (symnonym) - Give feed back. - ancient (adj) cổ xưa (example) Give examples - (a) reasort: khu an dưỡng, khu nghỉ mát (example) Practice new words( listen and - (to) admire:chiêm ngưỡng, ngắm nhìn repeat -> give meaning / stress. (translation) - Copy down. Checking:R&R b. Set the sence: Answer the questions: - Answer the questions 1. Where is it ? - Guess: 2. Do you like them ? 3. Why ? - Work in pairs. c. Open- prediction: ( T/F? ) - Give feed back. - Work in pairs to guess: 1. South east Asia has many attractions. 6’ - Listen /Read 2. We could visit many monuments. - Give feed back: 3. We can see shadow puppet shows in a. F d. F thailand. b. T c. T/F 4. There are thousands of kilometers of beaches. 2. While -reading: A2 p. 148 - Discuss in pairs a. - Listen : - Give feed back. - Read the text and correct: *Answer key: - Play agame in 2 teams a. T c. F b. F d. T - Correct: - Correct. b.Read the test and answer the questions: (a-f) Lucky numbers - Work in pairs. 1. The passage mentions three kinds of - Give feed back. tourist attractions. What are they?.

(219) 2. What is the famous ancient temple in Jave? 3. Where can people see famous traditional dances? 5. What can you see in the ocean? 3. Post- reading: *Discuss - Work in groups to list somes kinds of attractions in Viet Nam you may prefer. Ex: - I may prefer the [ beaches ]. - I may prefer the food. - I may prefer the monuments. IV. Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this lesson. The tourist actractions in South- east Asia. V. Homework: 1. Learn by heart new words 2. Do exersise A4 p. 101 in exercise book. 3. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: B1- 2 ( p. 157 - 158 in text book). 2’. -Retell the main points of this lesson.. - Copy down homework 1’. Week 34(16) Planning date: 20 / 04 / 2010 Teaching date: 29 / 04 / 2010.. Period 100.. Unit 16: People and places Lesson 3: B1,3 A. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read for details about famous people and events in Viet Nam . I. Knowledge ; - The famous people and events in Viet Nam . II. Skills: - Reading . III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer. B. Procedures: I. Settlements: - Greetings. T : Good morning , class. Ss: Good morning, teacher. T : How are you? Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you? T: who’s absent today? S1: Ss’ answer II. Warm -up: *Brainstorming III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Pre- reading: 5’ a. Pre- teach:.

(220) - (a) general: Đại tướng (explanation) - Practice new words( listen and - Defeat (v) Đánh thắng , đánh bại repeat -> give meaning / stress. - (a) battle : trận đánh,trận chiến đấu (translation) - powerful(adj) hùng mạnh, hùng cường, Repeat in chorus có quyền lực lớn (symnonym) - Army (n) quân đội (trans) - Copy down. - (a) lead: lãnh đạo (trans) - quiz(n) Câu đố (example) - Forces (n) sức mạnh, quyền lực - Commander –In- Chief(n) Tổng tư lệnh - Answer the questions: * kind (adj) (translation) S1: Checking: R and R S2: - Correct: 31’ - Guess: b. Set the sence: Answer the questions: - Work in pairs. 1.Who are they? - Give feed back. 2.What are they doing? 6’ - Listen /Read 3. What are they talking about ? - Give feed back c. Open- prediction: ( T/F? ) - Some Ss to go to the board to do - Work in pairs to guess: exercises. 3.Ex 3(p159) - Discuss in pairs -Read and answer the questions. - Give feed back. -T corrects and gives answer keys IV/Consolidation: -Retell the main points of this – Retel the main points of this leson lesson. - The famous people and events in Viet Nam . V/. Homework: 2’ - Copy down homework 1. Learn new words by heart. 2. Do exersise B1-2 p. 101-102 in exercise book. 3. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: B4 ( p. 159-160 in text book) 1’. Week 35(17) Planning date: 26 / 04 / 2010 Teaching date : 03 / 05/ 2010.. Period 101. Unit 16: People and places.

(221) Lesson 4: B4.Famous People A. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read for details about famous people and their biography. I. Knowledge ; - The famous people and their biography. II. Skills: - Reading . III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer. B. Procedures: I. Settlements: - Greetings. T : Good morning , class. Ss: Good morning, teacher. T : How are you? Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you? Who is absent today? Ss’ answer II. Warm -up: III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Pre- reading: 5’ - Practice new words( listen a. Pre- teach: and repeat -> give meaning / - (an) electric light bulb: bóng đèn điện stress. (drawing) - (a) power station : nhà máy điện - Copy down. (example) - (a) gramophone:máy hát đĩa (symnonym) - Answer the questions: - (a) motion picture: phim ảnh S1: (example) S2: - (a) fairy tale:chuyện thần tiên (realia)m *Checking:R&R - Guess: b. Set the sence: Answer the questions: - Work in pairs. 1.Who are they? - Give feed back. 2.What are they doing? 3. What are they talking about ? - Listen /Read c. Open- prediction: - Give feed back: - Work in pairs to guess: 3 - Discuss in pairs 1. Who is Thomas Edison? - Give feed back. 2. Who is Has Chistian Andersen? Tigers Lions 2. While -reading: B4 p. 159 a. - Listen : 6’ - Work in pairs. - Read the text and correct: - Give feed back. *Answer key: - Correct. - Correct: b.Read the test and answer the questions: (a- Work in pairs. f) - Give feed back. Lucky numbers S1:.

(222) 3. Post- reading: Role play a. Work in pairs to practice: Ex: A: Where were you born? B: I was born in 1847.. S2:. - correct: IV. Consolidation: - The famous people and events in Viet Nam . V. Homework: 1. Learn new words by heart. 2. Do exersise B3-4 p. 102-103 in exercise book. 3. Prepare new lesson Unit 16: B5 ( p.161 in text book). - Copy down homework. -Retell the main points of this lesson.. 2’. 1’. Week 36(18) Planning date: 04 / 05 / 2010. Teaching date : 10 / 05/ 2010.. Period 102. Unit 16: People and places Lesson 5: B2,5.Famous People A. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson , students will be able to listen for details about the biography of uncle Ho. I. Knowledge ; - The biography of uncle Ho. II. Skills: - Listening . III. Teaching aids: - Pictures / By computer. B. Procedures: I. Settlements: - Greetings. T : Good morning , class. Ss: Good morning, teacher. T : How are you? Ss: I' m fine, thank you. And you? T: who is absent today? S: Monitor’s answer.

(223) II. Warm -up: Pelmanism Leave/ left, go/went, become/became,move/ moved.... III. New lesson: Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities 1. Pre- listening: - - Practice new words a. Pre- teach: ( listen and repeat -> give - (to) found: Sáng lập meaning / stress. (explanation) 5’ - (to) form: Thành lập (symnonym) - (to) declare:Tuyên bố,công bố (translation) - Copy down. - independence (ucn)nền độc lập, sự độc lập(antonym) - Answer the questions: - President(n) chủ tich, tổng thống, hiệu trưởng S1: (Trans) S2: Checking: R&R b. Set the sence: Answer the questions: - Guess: 1.Where is uncle Ho from? - Work in pairs. 2.What's his birthday? 3.When did he die ? 32’ - Give feed back. c. Open- prediction: - Work in pairs to fill in the table: - Listen /Read 2. While -reading: B5 p. 161 - Give feed back: a. - Listen : - T gets feedback *Answer key: - Discuss in groups 3. Post- reading: Gap- filling - Give feed back. - Work in dividually to listen again the text and -Play agame in two teams: fill in the gaps. Tiger and Lion Ho Chi Minh.............(1) born in 1890 in Nghe * Keys: An province, in the village of Kim Lien. When 1.Was he was 21 years old, he .................(2)Viet Nam 2. left and...........(3) to Africa,England and 3. went America.After this, he................(4) in a hotel in 4. worked London in the early 1900s then moved toParis 5. …. in 1917. He ............(5) six years in Paris, one year in Moscow.  Keys: Ss copy down 4. B2(a-b) p.158 in text book answer keys a. Work in pairs to fill inthe gaps. Ex: 1. like Work in pairs. - correct: - Give feed back. b. Make another dialogue use clever, strong, - Correct. fast, beautiful... *.Exercises 2(158) 6’ a/Complete the dialogue with the words in the box. Then practice with a partner. - Work in pairs. Asks Ss to do exercise in pairs. - Give feed back..

(224) T corrects and gives answer keys 1.like 2.prefer 3. guess 4.favorite. b/ Make their own dialogues about famous people Ss know. Using the adjectives in the box. IV. Consolidation: - The biography of uncle Ho. V. Homework: 1. Learn new words by heart. 2. Do exersise B5 p.103 in exercise book. 3. Review Unit 9-16 for the examination test.. -Retell the main points of this lesson. - Copy down homework. 2’. 1’. Week 36(18) Planning date: 10 / 05 / 2010 Teaching date : 13 / 05/ 2010.. Period 103.Language focus 5 I/ The aims : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidation all structure grammar .The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises well . -Develop 4 skills: L,S,R,& W. II. Language content :* Review The simple past tense . / Preposition of position / How far…? / How much…? / Compound adjectives / Directions More,less,fewer. / Why-because… / Imperatives ./ Like/dislike … The simple past tense . Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much . Too / either / neither / so . Imperatives . III/Technique: Eliciting, pair work, group work. IV/Teaching aids: T: Textbook, tape, cassette, sub- board. S: EL books, Exercises books, notebook. V. Procedure: Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities *Warm up :Greetings . 1’ - Greetings . Ask Ss some questions such as : -Answer T’s questions . + What did you do yesterday ? + Did you watch TV last night ?.

(225) + What did you do during last summer - Look at the pictures and vacation ?........ answer what they are doing Remark and lead in new lesson . *.Consolidation and practice : -Answer the questions . 1)Past simple tense : -Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and -Work in pairs . answer what they are doing . -Call on some Ss to answer the questions in -Practice in front of the class . front of the class. i.Watch TV ./ k. Eat at a restaurant ./ l.Go to Write down . the movie theatre . m.Read books ./ n. Play soccer . -Have Ss answer the questions , using the 4’ -Repeat the indefinite quantifiers pictures . and the use. Make example : S1: Did you do your homework last night ? - Do exercise . S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV . -Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering Write the correct expression . the questions. Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . Give the answer . Correct and give the correct answers . f) Did you eat dinner at home on Write down in the notebooks . Wednesday ? No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant . -Look at the pictures and g) Did you go to school yesterday ? complete the dialogues . No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre . h) Did you watch a video on the - Work in pairs . weekend ? -Practice in front of the class. No, I didn’t . I read books . 23’ i) Did you play basketball yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I played soccer . Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . -Repeat the use of too, either , so 2)Indefinite quantifiers : and neither . -Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . Ask them to do exercise 2 .  Write the correct expression . -Practice the dialogues in pairs . -Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures . -Practice in front of the class -Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Play a game . Correct and give the correct answers : 2 groups take part in the game . + A little coffee . + A lot of salt . + A lot of tea . + Too much water . + A little sugar Make sentences with the words ,.

(226) -Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .  Complete the dialogues : Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues. Have Ss work in pairs . -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ./Remark. 3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither . Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither . Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs . Call on some pairs to practice in front the class . Have Ss play a game : Noughts and Crosses . Mangoes Bananas Papaya v v x Corn vSpinach potatos x Fish xChịken beef v 8’ -Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the notebooks. EX: S1: I like mangoes . S2: So do I / I do , too . S1: I don’t like bananas . S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I . 5) Imperatives : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions. explain some new words : + To Peel ( v ) /+ To mix ( v ) /+ Vinegar ( n ) -Call on some Ss to give their result in front of the class . -Correct and give the answer key : a) peel / e) Add/ b.Wash / f) Stir b) Slice / g) Wait / c.Mix 6’ *HOW MUCH IS IT ? *Form : How much is it / are they ? It is / They are + price. How much +be + S ? (How much + do/ does + S + cost?) à It’s/ They’re +( price ) *Use: Ask and answer about the prices. *The simple past tense : *Form: To be( was/were)… S + V_ed … V_qkbqt …. using too, so , either and neither Write down . -Look at the pictures and complete the instructions . -Listen and write down Give the answer . Write down in the notebooks . Two groups take part in the game. -Listen to the teacher. -Read the questions in the book and guess the answers ( work in groups) -Give the predictions. -Listen and check the predictions. -Listen and write down. -Read new words in chorus and individually, guess meaning then copy down. - Ss to answer some qs about the use, form of the simple past tense : Give the answers. Check the answers Write the answers in the notebooks..

(227) *Use: Diễn tả hành động xảy ra và kết thóc tại 1 thời điểm , khoảng thời gian x¸c định trong qu¸ khứ. - T asks ss to write the past form of the verbs in the table (p.97) Eg : buy -- > bought Note : Ordinary verbs are divided into 2 kinds :  regular verbs (- ed ) / (-d)  irregular verbs - T asks ss to do ex b 4 (p.97-98) - T gets feedback * Answer key : b, played / talked / bought / worked / sent c, help my mom and study English. *.More / Less and fewer : * More + countable noun ( nhiều hơn) * Fewer + countable noun ( it hơn) * Less + uncountable noun (it hơn) Asks ss to say the use of those then write the sentences according to the pictures. Eg : Before : there were 4 bananas Now : there are fewer bananas. * Prepositions :* Matching: 1. near a. ở bªn tr¸i 2. opposite b. ở gần 3. between c. ở bªn ph¶i 4. beside/ next to d. đối diện 5. to the right e. ở giữa 6. to the left f. bªn c¹nh T asks ss to retell some prepositions then look at the map and write the location of each store. a. Eg : The restaurant is next to the bookstore. *Why-because… Why + do/does + S + V …? - Because + S + V… *Model sentences : + What was wrong with you ? I had a headache. + What was wrong with her ? She had a bad cold.  Note : Hỏi và trả lời về tình trạng sức khỏe : What + was wrong with + pronoun? S + had + ( sickness ). -Look at the picture and answer the questions. Give the answers. Look at the book and listen to the tape. Read the text in silent Read the text aloud. -Complete the story with the suitable words. Exchange the result with the partner. Ex: He plays soccer (good/ well) He’s a (good/ well) player - (to) play – player - (to) run – runner - (to) cycle – cyclist *Examples: S1 : What was wrong with Lan ? S2 : She had a heachache. **a. S1 : I like spinach and cucumbers S2 : So do I / I do, too. b. S1 : I don’t like pork. S2 : Neither do I/ I don’t, either. a. Thích: I do, too So do I b.Không thích : I don’t either Neither do I.

(228) * word cue drill : Lan/ headache She/ toothache He/ flu. -Give the answers in front of the class.. You/ a cold Ba/ stomachache.  Model sentences : Position of adv of manner: S + V + (O) + adv of manner S + be/ look … + adj (a/ an) + adj + N  Gammar: Adj. + ly = adv of manner Ex: bad – badly Slow – slowly But good – well  Note : Express preferences :  ( Diễn tả ý thích hoặc ko thích ) + S + auxilary V, too. So, auxilary V + not + either. + S + auxilary V + not + either. Neither + auxilary V + S. *Grammar: + S + ought to/ must/ can/ should + V(inf ) + S + shouldn’t/ ought not to + V(inf) * Note : hỏi về sở thích. What would you like to + v (inf) ? I’d like to + V ( inf ) + N (ten phim ) * Model sentences : What kinds of programs do you like? I like program about teenagers. * Note : Hỏi và trả lời về ctrinh TV bạn thích What kinds of programs do/ does + S + like ? - S + like(s) + program about + Chương trình.. *Model Sentences: Don’t spend too much time in the arcade. No, I won’t. * Note : Lời khuyên , Câu mệnh lệnh - Don’t spend too much time in + place. Nhận lời : No. I won’t. * Consolidation: Repeat the structures which the students have learnt and Retell the main. Listen to the teacher. -Write homework. - Retell the content of the lesson individually. 2’ - Copy down homework 1’. Listen carefully . Write homework ..

(229) points of this lesson. * Homework: -Do all exercises. - Learn by heart vocabulary and some structure grammar. - Prepare for next lesson..

(230)

tieng anh THCS

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về